bay protection functions reb500 version 8.3 iec …...conformity this product complies with the...

194
RELION ® REB500 Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC Technical manual /ainmnu Events Measurements Disturbance records Settings 2013-03-3010:53:0 j$superUser jojectname a /Mainmenu = I ; D D 9? J;;:et�,SettirS confi�ation rustics rests O•� L� - I D I ; = D =

Upload: others

Post on 12-Jul-2020

8 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

RELION® REB500

Bay protection functions REB500Version 8.3 IECTechnical manual

/t1ainm1:nu

Events

Measurements

Disturbance records

Settings

2013-03-3010:53:.10 j$superUser joi,jectname

a

/Mainmenu

=

I ;

D

D

i!9?

J;;:::et�,�

SettirlgS

confi�ation

rua,gr,ostics

rests

O•�

L¥19"39f�

-

I D I

; = D =

Page 2: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws
Page 3: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

/t1ainm1:nu

Events

Measurements

Disturbance records

Settings

2013-03-3010:53:.10 j$superUser joi,jectname

a

/Mainmenu

=

I ;

D

D

i!9?

J;;:::et�,�

SettirlgS

confi�ation

rua,gr,ostics

rests

O•�

L¥19"39f�

-

I D I

; = D =

Document ID: 1MRK 505 406-UENIssued: May 2019

Revision: BProduct version: 8.3

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 4: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Copyright

This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without writtenpermission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, norused for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and maybe used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in theOpenSSLToolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographicsoftware written/developed by: Eric Young ([email protected]) and Tim Hudson([email protected]).

Trademarks

ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product namesmentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respectiveholders.

Warranty

Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.

Page 5: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Disclaimer

The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or productdescription and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All personsresponsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves thateach intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety orother operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications wherea system failure and /or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons(including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of theperson or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested toensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruledout. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer.Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible orliable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of theequipment.

Page 6: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Conformity

This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on theapproximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility(EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specifiedvoltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of testsconducted by ABB in accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 forthe EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the lowvoltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international standards ofthe IEC 60255 series.

Page 7: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.................................................................................................... 71.1 This manual....................................................................................................................................71.2 Intended audience........................................................................................................................ 71.3 Product documentation.............................................................................................................. 71.4 Symbols and conventions........................................................................................................... 71.4.1 Symbols........................................................................................................................................ 71.4.2 Document conventions............................................................................................................. 8

Section 2 Safety information.........................................................................................9

Section 3 Signals............................................................................................................ 113.1 Signal designations.................................................................................................................... 113.1.1 Bay/Station protection — function overlapping signal....................................................113.1.1.1 Signal designations.............................................................................................................113.1.1.2 Outputs generated by BP and used as SP inputs (default signals)...........................113.1.1.3 General inputs to BP........................................................................................................... 123.1.1.4 General outputs from BP................................................................................................... 123.1.2 Bay protection — function-specific signals........................................................................ 133.1.2.1 Signal designations of binary inputs and outputs.......................................................133.1.2.2 Signal designations of BP internal signals.................................................................... 143.1.2.3 Binary input signals of BP..................................................................................................143.1.2.4 Binary output signals of BP............................................................................................... 17

Section 4 System settings............................................................................................234.1 Voltage transformers for bay protection.............................................................................. 234.2 Star point setting for bay protection..................................................................................... 234.3 Scaling factor setting for bay protection..............................................................................24

Section 5 Bay protection functions.............................................................................255.1 Distance protection 21 (DIST).................................................................................................. 255.1.1 Mode of operation................................................................................................................... 255.1.2 Features..................................................................................................................................... 255.1.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................. 255.1.3.1 CT/VT inputs........................................................................................................................255.1.3.2 Binary inputs........................................................................................................................265.1.3.3 Binary outputs.....................................................................................................................265.1.3.4 Measurements..................................................................................................................... 275.1.4 Function settings..................................................................................................................... 275.1.5 Parameters................................................................................................................................ 305.1.6 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 375.1.6.1 General.................................................................................................................................. 375.1.6.2 Starters................................................................................................................................. 37

Table of contents

Bay protection functions REB500 1Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 8: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.1.6.3 Measurement.......................................................................................................................415.1.6.4 Definitive zone (Def).......................................................................................................... 475.1.6.5 Backup overcurrent unit (O/C Backup Protection)..................................................... 485.1.6.6 VT supervision.....................................................................................................................485.1.6.7 Tripping logic...................................................................................................................... 495.1.6.8 Power-swing blocking....................................................................................................... 505.1.6.9 Supplementary information for binary inputs............................................................. 505.1.7 Technical description.............................................................................................................. 525.1.7.1 Starters................................................................................................................................. 525.1.7.2 Distance measurement..................................................................................................... 585.1.7.3 VT supervision.....................................................................................................................645.1.7.4 Backup overcurrent function (O/C Backup)..................................................................685.1.7.5 System logic........................................................................................................................ 685.2 Definite time over- and undercurrent protection 51 (OCDT).............................................915.2.1 Mode of operation....................................................................................................................915.2.2 Features......................................................................................................................................915.2.3 Inputs and outputs...................................................................................................................915.2.3.1 CT/VT inputs........................................................................................................................915.2.3.2 Binary inputs........................................................................................................................ 915.2.3.3 Binary outputs..................................................................................................................... 915.2.3.4 Measurements..................................................................................................................... 915.2.4 Function settings..................................................................................................................... 925.2.5 Parameters................................................................................................................................ 925.2.6 Configuration............................................................................................................................925.3 Inverse time overcurrent protection 51 (OC)........................................................................945.3.1 Mode of operation................................................................................................................... 945.3.2 Features..................................................................................................................................... 945.3.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................. 955.3.3.1 CT/VT inputs....................................................................................................................... 955.3.3.2 Binary inputs........................................................................................................................955.3.3.3 Binary outputs.....................................................................................................................955.3.3.4 Measurements.....................................................................................................................955.3.4 Function settings..................................................................................................................... 955.3.5 Parameters................................................................................................................................ 965.3.6 Configuration............................................................................................................................965.4 Directional overcurrent definite time protection 67 (DIROCDT)......................................995.4.1 Mode of operation................................................................................................................... 995.4.2 Features..................................................................................................................................... 995.4.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................. 995.4.3.1 CT/VT inputs....................................................................................................................... 995.4.3.2 Binary inputs........................................................................................................................995.4.3.3 Binary outputs.....................................................................................................................995.4.3.4 Measurements.................................................................................................................... 995.4.4 Function settings...................................................................................................................1005.4.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1005.4.6 Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 101

Table of contents

2 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 9: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.5 Directional overcurrent inverse time protection 67 (DIROCINV)....................................1045.5.1 Mode of operation................................................................................................................. 1045.5.2 Features................................................................................................................................... 1045.5.3 Inputs and outputs................................................................................................................ 1055.5.3.1 CT/VT inputs..................................................................................................................... 1055.5.3.2 Binary inputs......................................................................................................................1055.5.3.3 Binary outputs...................................................................................................................1055.5.3.4 Measurements...................................................................................................................1055.5.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1055.5.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1065.5.6 Configuration..........................................................................................................................1075.6 Definite time over- and undervoltage protection 59/27 (OVDT).....................................1115.6.1 Mode of operation.................................................................................................................. 1115.6.2 Features.................................................................................................................................... 1115.6.3 Inputs and outputs................................................................................................................. 1115.6.3.1 CT/VT inputs...................................................................................................................... 1115.6.3.2 Binary inputs.......................................................................................................................1115.6.3.3 Binary outputs....................................................................................................................1125.6.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1125.6.4 Function settings....................................................................................................................1125.6.5 Parameters............................................................................................................................... 1125.6.6 Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 1135.7 Synchrocheck 25 (SYNC)..........................................................................................................1145.7.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1145.7.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1145.7.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................1155.7.3.1 CT/VT inputs...................................................................................................................... 1155.7.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1155.7.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1155.7.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1165.7.4 Function settings....................................................................................................................1165.7.5 Parameters............................................................................................................................... 1175.7.6 Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 1215.7.6.1 General.................................................................................................................................1215.7.6.2 Parameters to be set........................................................................................................ 1225.7.6.3 Supplementary information for binary inputs............................................................ 1275.8 Autoreclosure 79 (AR).............................................................................................................. 1295.8.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1295.8.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1295.8.3 Inputs and outputs................................................................................................................ 1305.8.3.1 CT/VT inputs..................................................................................................................... 1305.8.3.2 Binary inputs......................................................................................................................1305.8.3.3 Binary outputs....................................................................................................................1315.8.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1315.8.4 Function settings....................................................................................................................1315.8.5 Parameters...............................................................................................................................133

Table of contents

Bay protection functions REB500 3Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 10: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.8.6 Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 1375.8.6.1 General................................................................................................................................ 1375.8.6.2 Connections between autoreclosure and distance functions.................................1385.8.6.3 Connections between autoreclosure and overcurrent functions........................... 1395.8.6.4 Coordinating autoreclosure (AR) with first and second main protections.......... 1405.8.6.5 Timers..................................................................................................................................1415.8.6.6 Supplementary information for binary inputs............................................................1445.8.6.7 Supplementary information for binary outputs.........................................................1455.8.7 Timing diagrams.....................................................................................................................1475.8.8 Checking the dead times...................................................................................................... 1545.9 Directional sensitive EF protection for grounded system 67N (DIREFGND)................ 1575.9.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1575.9.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1575.9.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................1575.9.3.1 CT/VT inputs......................................................................................................................1575.9.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1575.9.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1575.9.3.4 Measurements...................................................................................................................1585.9.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1585.9.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1595.9.6 Configuration..........................................................................................................................1605.9.6.1 Coordination with the distance protection................................................................ 1605.9.6.2 Choice of operating mode...............................................................................................1615.9.6.3 Choice of transfer tripping scheme.............................................................................. 1615.9.6.4 Setting the enabling pick-up levels............................................................................... 1655.9.6.5 Setting the characteristic angle.................................................................................... 1665.9.6.6 Setting the basic time (tBasic).........................................................................................166

5.9.6.7 Circuit-breaker delay........................................................................................................1665.9.6.8 Comparison time.............................................................................................................. 1665.9.6.9 Setting the wait time (tWait)........................................................................................... 166

5.9.6.10 Setting the transient blocking time (t TransBlk)........................................................1675.9.6.11 CT/VT inputs of the function......................................................................................... 1675.9.6.12 Supplementary information for binary inputs............................................................ 1675.9.6.13 Supplementary information for binary outputs.........................................................1685.10 Inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection 51N (I0INV)...........................................1685.10.1 Mode of operation................................................................................................................. 1685.10.2 Features................................................................................................................................... 1685.10.3 Inputs and outputs................................................................................................................ 1695.10.3.1 CT/VT inputs..................................................................................................................... 1695.10.3.2 Binary inputs......................................................................................................................1695.10.3.3 Binary outputs...................................................................................................................1695.10.3.4 Measurements...................................................................................................................1695.10.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1695.10.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1705.10.6 Configuration..........................................................................................................................1705.11 Logic/Trip Logic (LOGIC)........................................................................................................ 173

Table of contents

4 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 11: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.11.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1735.11.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1735.11.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................1735.11.3.1 CT/VT inputs......................................................................................................................1735.11.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1735.11.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1735.11.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1735.11.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1745.11.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1745.12 Delay/Integrator (DELAY)....................................................................................................... 1745.12.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1745.12.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1755.12.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................1755.12.3.1 CT/VT inputs......................................................................................................................1755.12.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1755.12.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1755.12.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1755.12.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1755.12.5 Parameters...............................................................................................................................1765.12.6 Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 1775.12.6.1 Operation of the function without integration...........................................................1775.12.6.2 Operation of the function with integration.................................................................1785.13 Three-phase current plausibility 46 (I3PH)..........................................................................1785.13.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1785.13.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1785.13.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................1795.13.3.1 CT/VT inputs......................................................................................................................1795.13.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1795.13.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1795.13.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1795.13.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1795.13.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1805.14 Three-phase voltage plausibility 47 (U3PH)........................................................................1805.14.1 Mode of operation................................................................................................................. 1805.14.2 Features................................................................................................................................... 1805.14.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................1815.14.3.1 CT/VT inputs...................................................................................................................... 1815.14.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1815.14.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1815.14.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1815.14.4 Function settings....................................................................................................................1815.14.5 Parameters...............................................................................................................................1815.15 Peak value over and undercurrent protection 50 (OCINST).............................................1825.15.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1825.15.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1825.15.3 Inputs and outputs................................................................................................................ 182

Table of contents

Bay protection functions REB500 5Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 12: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.15.3.1 CT/VT inputs......................................................................................................................1825.15.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1825.15.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1835.15.3.4 Measurements...................................................................................................................1835.15.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1835.15.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1835.15.6 Configuration..........................................................................................................................184

Table of contents

6 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 13: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manualGUID-B24D1C9F-CFA9-4CC0-9261-4980D3773540 v1

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists functionblocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sortedper function of the bay protection functions. The manual can be used as a technical referenceduring the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normalservice.

1.2 Intended audienceGUID-7DC1D391-D39C-4FA6-97B2-9DF1729A518C v1

This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel, whouse technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.

The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protectionequipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs. Theinstallation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in handling electronicequipment.

1.3 Product documentationGUID-91F0A03F-D1AF-4695-A239-1FC87E7459EE v2

REB500 manuals Document numbers

Product guide 1MRK 505 402-BEN

Application manual 1MRK 505 399-UEN

Technical manual 1MRK 505 400-UEN

Operation manual 1MRK 500 132-UEN

Engineering manual 1MRK 511 452-UEN

Commissioning manual 1MRK 505 401-UEN

Application manual for bay protection functions 1MRK 505 403-UEN

Technical manual for bay protection functions 1MRK 505 406-UEN

Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 453-UEN

Communication protocol manual IEC61850 1MRK 511 450-UEN

Communication protocol manual IEC60870-5-103 1MRK 511 451-UEN

Getting started guide 1MRK 505 404-UEN

1.4 Symbols and conventions

1.4.1 SymbolsGUID-4F7DD10A-DEE5-4297-8697-B8AAB5E3262F v2

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which couldresult in electrical shock.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 1Introduction

Bay protection functions REB500 7Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 14: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result inpersonal injury.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to theconcept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard whichcould result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project orhow to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand thatunder certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result indegraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore, comply fullywith all warning and caution notices.

1.4.2 Document conventionsGUID-37C3ACF4-BD79-43C6-B37E-24B38EE69301 v2

A particular convention may not be used in this manual.

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The glossaryalso contains definitions of important terms.

• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push buttonicons.

For example, to navigate the options, use and .• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.

For example, select Main menu/Settings.• Signal names are presented in bold.

The signal 21120_EXT_TEST_TRIP can be set and reset via the LHMI Test Trip menu.• Parameter names and parameter values are presented in italics.

For example, the default value of the Operation setting is Not inverted.• Section references are presented with the respective section numbers.

For example, see Section 1.4.2 for more details about document conventions.

Section 1 1MRK 505 406-UEN BIntroduction

8 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 15: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Section 2 Safety informationGUID-7CDA9FB7-5CD6-4BD5-A1D2-AAB8E7BF87A3 v2

Dangerous voltages can occur on the connectors, even though the auxiliaryvoltage has been disconnected.

Non-observance can result in death, personal injury or substantial propertydamage.

Only a competent electrician is allowed to carry out the electrical installation.

National and local electrical safety regulations must always be followed.

The frame of the IEDs has to be carefully earthed.

Whenever changes are made in the IEDs, measures should be taken to avoidinadvertent tripping.

The IEDs contain components which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge.Unnecessary touching of electronic components must therefore be avoided.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 2Safety information

Bay protection functions REB500 9Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 16: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

10

Page 17: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Section 3 Signals

3.1 Signal designations

3.1.1 Bay/Station protection — function overlapping signal

3.1.1.1 Signal designationsGUID-473B447A-C76B-4A92-923D-D0987D089E87 v1

The BP/SP function overlapping (general) signals correspond to the signal numbersnomenclature of the station protection system (for details, see REB500 Technical Manual).

For example, 19205_Block BP (5 digit signal number)

3.1.1.2 Outputs generated by BP and used as SP inputs (default signals)GUID-9B46ED80-5132-49AE-BD97-776AD0CFFAB8 v1

Table 1: BU_ BP outputs to SP inputs (default signals)

Parameter Description

11120_BP External TRIP This is the tripping signal generated by bay protection of REB500. It trips faultson a line with the aid of the REB500 tripping contact. Tripping thus takesaccount of the busbar configuration at the time. The signal is activated by thebay protection directly and does not therefore appear as binary input signal.

11125_BP External TRIP BBzone

This is a tripping signal generated by the bay protection of REB500 which isused to trip the entire bus zone to which the bay is connected. The trippingcommand is applied to all the bay units of the bus zone and sections of busbarsinterconnected by an isolator (intertripping).

13210_BP Block BFP This signal is directly activated by the bay protection and doesn’t thereforeappear as a binary input signal. The operation of the breaker failure protectionof the corresponding feeder is blocked. When the blocking signal is cancelledand providing a starting signal is present and current is flowing, the timers startagain at t = 0.

13610_BP Trip transfer Reserved for the special application “trip transfer”.This signal is directly activated by the bay protection unit and does nottherefore appear as a binary input signal.

13761_BP Start BFP L1L2L3_5 This signal is functionally identical to signal 13760_Start BFP L1L2L3_5, but it isdirectly activated by the bay protection and does not therefore appear as abinary input signal.

13770..13780_BP Start BFP Lp Breaker failure protection with phase-selective starting (p = 1, 2 or 3). Thebreaker failure protection timer starts when this signal is activated by BPfunctions and the BFP measures a current in the corresponding phase. Thissignal is directly activated by the bay protection and does not therefore appearas a binary input signal.

13785_BP Start BFP L1L2L3 Breaker failure protection with three-phase starting. The breaker failureprotection timer starts when this signal is activated and the BFP measures acurrent in any phase.This signal is directly activated by the bay protection and does not thereforeappear as a binary input signal.

13790_BP External start BFP Breaker failure protection with three-phase starting. The breaker failureprotection timer starts when this signal is activated regardless of the currentmeasurement.This signal is directly activated by the bay protection and does not thereforeappear as a binary input signal.

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 3Signals

Bay protection functions REB500 11Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 18: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Parameter Description

13797_BP Start BFP L0 Breaker failure protection with L0 - starting. The breaker failure protection timerstarts when this signal is activated by BP functions and the BFP measures acurrent in the neutral system. This signal is directly activated by the bayprotection and does not therefore appear as a binary input signal.

16760_BP Global Start DR Starts those disturbance recorders in the bay units that are configured. Thesignal Central start DR in the bay units must be configured. This signal isdirectly activated by the BP unit and does not therefore appear as a binary inputsignal.

29110_BP TRIP Three phase tripping commands of the bay protection functions grouped to onethree phase tripping command.

29115_BP TRIP L1 Phase L1 tripping commands of the bay protection functions grouped to one L1tripping command.

29120_BP TRIP L2 Phase L2 tripping commands of the bay protection functions grouped to one L2tripping command.

29125_BP TRIP L3 Phase L3 tripping commands of the bay protection functions grouped to one L3tripping command.

3.1.1.3 General inputs to BPGUID-12A957D0-9790-4481-A4DD-9AEB710C7EDA v1

Table 2: BU_ Inputs to BP

Signal Description

19205_Block BP The BP output signals of the respective bay unit are blocked. (Internalprocessing of the functions continues and therefore, measurements andsignals continue to be displayed on the local HMI.)

19600_Activation BP ParSet_1 The protection functions and settings assigned to parameter set 1 areactive. They remain active after the signal has been reset.

19605_Activation BP ParSet_2 The protection functions and settings assigned to parameter set 2 areactive. They remain active after the signal has been reset.

19610_Activation BP ParSet_3 The protection functions and settings assigned to parameter set 3 areactive. They remain active after the signal has been reset.

19615_Activation BP ParSet_4 The protection functions and settings assigned to parameter set 4 areactive. They remain active after the signal has been reset.

Table 3: CU_ Inputs to BP

Signal Description

39205_Block BP The bay protection output signals are blocked throughout the system(internal processing of the functions continues and thereforemeasurements and signals continue to be displayed on the local HMI).

3.1.1.4 General outputs from BPGUID-709FCA1C-61DC-4212-B18C-A3C7E665BA81 v1

Table 4: BU_ Output signals from BP

Signal Description

29405_BP blocked Signals that the outputs of the bay protection functions are blocked (eitherthe bay concerned or throughout the system).

29410_BP partial blocked Signals certain bay protection functions are blocked (Signal must be setexplicitly in the bay protection).

29600 ParaSet_1 active Signals that parameter set 1 is active (activated via the station bus or aninput signal).

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSignals

12 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 19: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

29605 ParaSet_2 active Signals that parameter set 2 is active (activated via the station bus or aninput signal).

29610 ParaSet_3 active Signals that parameter set 3 is active (activated via the station bus or aninput signal).

29615 ParaSet_4 active Signals that parameter set 4 is active (activated via the station bus or aninput signal).

Table 5: CU_ Output signals from BP

Signal Description

49405_BP blocked Signals that the outputs of the bay protection functions are blocked (eitherindividual bays or throughout the system).

49410_BP partial blocked Signals that certain bay protection output signals in specific bays orthroughout the entire system are blocked (Must be configured togetherwith the corresponding BU output signal 29410_BP partial blocked).

3.1.2 Bay protection — function-specific signals

3.1.2.1 Signal designations of binary inputs and outputsGUID-FE8F3DC7-0BD5-420D-B714-A153E9909188 v1

The signal range of REB500 is expanded for the bay protection functions. The BP function-specific signal can be identified by a 6 digit signal number.

Example: Signal 211105_DIST_Trip CB L1

211105 DIST Trip CB L1

6 Digit signal number Protection function Signal designation

Table 6: 6 Digit signal numbers nomenclature

Digit 1Category

Digit 2,3Protectionfunction

Digit 4Signal function

Digit 5,6Sequence number

1 BU_in 11 DIST 1 TRIP 05

2 BU_out 12 OCDT 2 Block command 10

3 CU_in 13 OCINV 3 Tripping signal 15

4 CU_out 14 DIROCDT 4 Blocking signal 20

5 System 15 DIROCINV 5 Bus image etc.

16 OVTD 6 Control

17 SYNC 7 Start

18 AR 8 General alarm

20 DIREFGND

21 I0INV

22 LOGIC

23 DELAY

24 CHKI3PH

25 CHKU3PH

26 OCINST

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 3Signals

Bay protection functions REB500 13Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 20: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

3.1.2.2 Signal designations of BP internal signalsGUID-764F4101-DC86-4CF1-9017-FD5A8781F16F v1

Each BP function provides a set of internal input and output signals. They can be mapped tobinary inputs (optocoupler) and outputs (contacts) of the bay unit by using the correspondingbinary inputs and output signals.

Example:

BP internal Signal Designation of binary input signal

Trip CB L1 211105_DIST TRIP CB L1

3.1.2.3 Binary input signals of BPGUID-B4B529FA-3ECA-4C05-AF69-405710ED47A4 v1

Table 7: BU_ DIST input signals

BP internal signal text Designation of binary input signal Description

Ext Blk Dist 111205_DIST Ext. Block Dist. Input for disabling the distance protectionfunction.

Ext Blk PSB 111215_DIST Ext. Blk. PSB Input for blocking the power-swing function

Ext Blk O/C 111220_DIST Ext. Block O/C Input the backup overcurrent function

ExtBlkSOTF 111225_DIST Ext. Block SOTF Input for blocking the tripping condition forthe switch-onto-fault logic

ExtBlkHF 111230_DIST Ext. Block HF Input for blocking a received PLC signal(controlled, for example, by a sensitive E/Fscheme using the same PLC channel

ExtBlock Z1 111235_DIST Ext. Block Z1 Input for blocking measurement in the firstzone

Manual close 111505_DIST Manual Close Circuit breaker manual close command

Isolator Open 111510_DIST Isolator Open Isolator open signal for activating the ‘short-zone’ logic and protection (T section in 1½breaker schemes)

ChgMeasDir 111605_DIST Change Meas. Dir. Input for changing the direction ofmeasurement

DeadLine 111805_DIST Deadline Line de-energized signal (auxiliary contact onthe circuit-breaker when the VTs are on thebusbar)

ZExtension 111810_DIST Zextension External zone extension control signalZone extension

Com Rec 111815_DIST Com Rec Input for PLC signal from the remote station

Com Fail 111820_DIST Com Fail Input for PLC failure signal

1PolAR 111825_DIST 1 pol AR Single-phase auto-reclosure ready

ZExtensionAR 111830_DIST ZExtension AR Zone extension control signalby AR

Table 8: BU_ OCDT input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Block 112205_OCDT Block Input for blocking OCDT

Table 9: BU_ OCINV input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Block 113205_OCINV Block Input for blocking of OCINV

Section 3 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSignals

14 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 21: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Table 10: BU_ DIROCDT input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Block 114205_DIROCDT Block Input for Blocking of DIROCDT

Receive 114805_DIROCDT Receive PLC receive signal

Table 11: BU_ DIROCINV input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Block 115205_DIROCINV Block Input for blocking of DIROCINV

Receive 115805_DIROCINV Receive PLC receive signal

Table 12: BU_ OVDT input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Block 116205_OVDT Block Input for blocking of OVTD

Table 13: BU_ SYNC input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Release Input 1 117205_SYNC Release Input 1 Enabling the synchrocheck function

Release Input 2 117210_SYNC Release Input 2 Enabling the synchrocheck function

Interlock Sync bus 1 117215_SYNC Interlock Bus 1 Input for interlocking the synchrocheck O/P’s

Interlock Sync bus 2 117220_SYNC Interlock Bus 2 Input for interlocking the synchrocheck O/P’s

Interlock Sync line 117225_SYNC Interlock Line Inputs for interlocking the synchrocheck O/P’s

Bus 1 Active 117805_SYNC Bus 1 Active Input for remotely switching voltage channel(bus 1) in double busbar stations

Bus 2 Active 117810_SYNC Bus 2 Active Input for remotely switching voltage channel(bus 2) in double busbar stations

Override Sync 117815_SYNC Override Bypassing the synchrocheck function

Operation ModeInput 1

117820_SYNC Op. Mode Input 1 Inputs for remotely selecting operating mode

Operation ModeInput 2

117825_SYNC Op. Mode Input 2 Inputs for remotely selecting operating mode

Table 14: BU_ AR input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Ext. block AR 118205_AR Ext.Block AR External blocking input

Cond. Block AR 118210_AR Cond.Block AR Conditional blocking input

Inhibit Close 118215_AR Inhibit Close Block reclosure by follower (red.scheme)

Mast. no Succ. 118220_AR Mast. no Succ. Block from master CB

Trip CB 3P 118305_AR Trip CB 3P Three phase trip

Trip CB 118310_AR Trip CB General trip

Trip CB2 3P *) 118315_AR Trip CB2 3P Redundant three phase trip

Trip CB2 *) 118320_AR Trip CB2 Redundant general trip

Trip CB3 3P *) 118325_AR Trip CB3 3P Redundant three phase trip

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 3Signals

Bay protection functions REB500 15Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 22: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Trip CB3 *) 118330_AR Trip CB3 Redundant general trip

CB Ready 118505_AR CB Ready CB ready for open/close/open cycle

CO Ready 118510_AR CO Ready CB ready for close/open cycle

CB Open 118515_AR CB Open CB Open

CB2 Ready **) 118520_AR CB2 Ready CB ready for open/close/open cycle

CO2 Ready **) 118525_AR CO Ready 2 CB ready for close/open cycle

CB2 Open **) 118530_AR CB2 Open CB2 Open

Manual Close 118535_AR Manual Close Blocking I/P excited by the manual CB closesignal.

CB2 Priority **) 118540_AR CB2 Priority CB2 preferred circuit-breaker

Start 118705_AR Start Start

Start 2 *) 118710_AR Start 2 Redundand start

Start 3 *) 118715_AR Start 3 Redundant start

Dead Line 118805_AR Dead Line Deadline

Dead Line 2 **) 118810_AR Dead Line 2 Deadline 2

Extended t1 118815_AR Extended t1 External extension of dead time

Synchro Check 118820_AR Synchro Check Synchrocheck

Synchro Check 2 **) 118825_AR Synchro Check 2 Synchrocheck 2

Ex SC ByPass 118830_AR Ext. SC ByPass External Synchrocheck bypass

MD1_EXT_1P_1P 118835_AR EXT_1P_1P External 1P-1P selector for 1st. AR

MD1_EXT_1P_3P 118840_AR EXT_1P_3P External 1P-3P selector for 1st. AR

MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P 118845_AR EXT_1P3P_3P External 1P3P-3P selector for 1st. AR

MD1_EXT_1P3P_1P3P 118850_AR EXT_1P3P_1P3P Ext. 1P3P-1P3P select. for 1st. AR

Master Delay 118855_AR Master Delay Delay from master CB

*) 2 and 3 denote the inputs of protection functions 2 and 3 or relays 2 and 3 in a redundant protection scheme.**) 2 denotes the inputs for CB2 in a duplex scheme.

Table 15: BU_ DIREFGND input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Block 120205_DIREFGND Block Input for blocking of DIREFGND

CB Closed 120505_DIREFGND CB Closed CB position indicator signal

Extern Start L1 120710_DIREFGND Ext. Start L1 Input for Dist. protection phase L1 starting

Extern Start L2 120715_DIREFGND Ext. Start L2 Input for Dist. protection phase L2 starting

Extern Start L3 120720_DIREFGND Ext. Start L3 Input for Dist. protection phase L3 starting

Extern Trip 3P 120725_DIREFGND Ext. Trip 3P Input for Dist. protection Trip CB three phase

Extern Trip 120730_DIREFGND Ext. Trip Input for Dist. protection Trip CB

Receive 120805_DIREFGND Receive PLC receive signal

VT supervision 120810_DIREFGND VTSupervision

Input for VT supervision

Table 16: BU_ I0INV input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Block 121205_I0INV Block Input for blocking of I0INV

Section 3 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSignals

16 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 23: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Table 17: BU_ Logic input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Block 122205_LOGIC Block Input for blocking LOGIC function

Binary Input 1 122805_LOGIC Binary Input 1 Logic input 1

Binary Input 2 122810_LOGIC Binary Input 2 Logic input 2

Binary Input 3 122815_LOGIC Binary Input 3 Logic input 3

Binary Input 4 122820_LOGIC Binary Input 4 Logic input 4

Table 18: BU_ Delay input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Block 123205_DELAY Block Input for blocking of DELAY function

Binary Input 123805_DELAY Binary Input Input to be delayed

Table 19: BU_CHKI3PH input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Block 124205_CHKI3PH Block Input for blocking of CHKI3PH

Table 20: BU_ CHKU3PH input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Block 125205_CHKU3PH Block Input for blocking of CHKU3PH

Table 21: BU_ OCINST input signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description

Block 126205_OCINST Block Input for blocking of OCINST

3.1.2.4 Binary output signals of BPGUID-F1D864A5-98AE-4329-8CF0-DEA1F988A246 v1

Table 22: BU_ DIST output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip CB L1 211105_DIST TRIP CB L1 Circuit-breaker L1 phase tripThis signal is disabled while a blockingsignal is being applied with the exception ofa trip by the backup over-current protection.

Trip CB L2 211110_DIST TRIP CB L2 Circuit-breaker L2 phase tripThis signal is disabled while a blockingsignal is being applied with the exception ofa trip by the backup over-current protection

Trip CB L3 211115_DIST TRIP CB L3 Circuit-breaker L3 phase tripThis signal is disabled while a blockingsignal is being applied with the exception ofa trip by the backup over-current protection.

Trip CB 211305_DIST TRIP CB General circuit-breaker tripping signal. Thissignal is disabled while a blocking signal isbeing applied with the exception of a trip bythe backup overcurrent protection.

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 3Signals

Bay protection functions REB500 17Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 24: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip L1L2L3Trip L1L2L3 Aux

211310_DIST Trip L1L2L3211315_DIST Trip L1L2L3 Aux

General tripping signal. This signal is notdisabled while a blocking signal is beingapplied.

Trip CB 3P 211320_DIST Trip CB 3ph Three-phase trip signal. This signal isdisabled while a blocking signal is beingapplied with the exception of a trip by thebackup overcurrent protection.

Trip CB 1P 211325_DIST Trip CB 1ph Single-phase trip signal. This signal isdisabled while a blocking signal is beingapplied with the exception of a trip by thebackup overcurrent protection.

Trip O/C 211330_DIST Trip O/C Backup overcurrent trip signal.

Trip SOTF 211335_DIST Trip SOTF Switch-onto-fault trip signal.

Trip Com 211340_DIST Trip Com Signal for tripping either enabled by thereceipt of a permissive signal or the non-receipt of a blocking signal. (This signal isdisabled while a blocking signal is beingapplied.)

Trip Stub 211345_DIST Trip Stub Short-zone protection trip signal.

Dist Blocked 211405_DIST Blocked Signal indicating that the distanceprotection is blocked.

DelDistBlk 211410_DIST Del Blocked Signal delayed by 12 s indicating that thedistance protection is blocked.

Start L1+L2+L3 211705_DIST Start L1+L2+L3 General distance protection starting signal(OR logic for all starting signals excepting‘weak infeed').

Start L1L2L3Start L1L2L3 Aux

211710_DIST StartL1L2L3211715_DIST Start L1L2L3Aux

General distance protection starting signal(OR logic for all starting signals includingweak infeed').

Start L1Start L1 Aux

211720_DIST Start L1211725_DIST Start L1 Aux

Distance protection L1 phase starting signal(including ‘weak infeed').

Start L2Start L2 Aux

211730_DIST Start L2211735_DIST Start L2 Aux

Distance protection L2 phase starting signal(including ‘weak infeed').

Start L3Start L3 Aux

211740_DIST Start L3211745_DIST Start L3 Aux

Distance protection L3 phase starting signal(including weak infeed).

Start L0Start L0 Aux

211750_DIST Start E211755_DIST Start E Aux

Distance protection E/F starting signal (U0or I0). Only generated together with a phasestarter.

Start I0 211760_DIST Start I0 Neutral current starting signal (I0).

Start U0 211765_DIST Start U0 Neutral voltage starting signal (U0).

Start OC 211770_DIST Start O/C Overcurrent starting signal.

Start SOFT 211780_DIST Start SOTF Enabling signal for the switch-onto-faultprot.

Start O/C 211785_DIST Start OC Backup overcurrent start signal.

Start UZ 211790_DIST Start UZ Underimpedance starting signal.

Start 1ph 211805_DIST Start 1ph Indicates that the distance protection wasstarted by a single phase.

Delay >= 2 211810_DIST Delay >= 2 Signal for starting in Zone 2 or higher.

Delay 1 211815_DIST Delay 1 Signal for starting in Zone 1.

Delay 2 211820_DIST Delay 2 Signal for starting in Zone 2.

Delay 3 211825_DIST Delay 3 Signal for starting in Zone 3.

Table continues on next page

Section 3 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSignals

18 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 25: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Delay 4 211830_DIST Delay 4 Signal for starting in Zone 4 (exceptingwhen Zone 4 is being used as anoverreaching zone).

Delay Def 211835_DIST Delay Def Signal for starting in the final zone.

Meas Main 211840_DIST Meas Main Measurement by the distance function(Zones 1, 2, 3, 4 or the final zone).

Meas Oreach 211845_DIST Meas Oreach Measurement in the distance protectionoverreach zone.

Meas Fward 211850_DIST Meas Fward Measurement by the distance protection inthe forwards direction.

Meas Bward 211855_DIST Meas Bward Measurement by the distance protection inthe reverse direction (reverse zone).

Weak Infeed 211860_DIST Weak Infeed Tripping by the ‘weak infeed’ function.

Power Swing 211865_DIST Power Swing Power-swing blocking function picked up.

VTSup 211870_DIST VT Sup VT supervision picked up.

VTSup Delay 211875_DIST VT Sup Delay Delayed operation of the VT supervisionafter 12 s.

Com Send 211880_DIST Com Send Signal generated when a transfer trip signalis transmitted.

Com Boost 211885_DIST Com Boost Signal for boosting PLC transmitting power.

Freq dev 211890_DIST Freq Dev Signal indicating a deviation of the memoryvoltage frequency.

Table 23: BU_OCDT output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip 212105_OCDT TRIP Trip signal

Start 212705_OCDT Start Start signal

Table 24: BU_OCINV output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip 213105_OCINV TRIP Trip signal

Start 213705_OCINV Start Start signal

Table 25: BU_DIROCDT output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip 214105_DIROCDT TRIP Trip signal

Start 214705_DIROCDT Start Start signal

Start L1 214710_DIROCDT Start L1 L1 phase start signal

Start L2 214715_DIROCDT Start L2 L2 phase start signal

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 3Signals

Bay protection functions REB500 19Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 26: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Start L3 214720_DIROCDT Start L3 L3 phase start signal

MeasFwd 214805_DIROCDT MeasFwd Signals measurement in the forwardsdirection.

MeasBwd 214810_DIROCDT MeasBwd Signals measurement in thebackwards direction.

Table 26: BU_DIROCINV output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip 215305_DIROCINV TRIP Trip signal

Start 215705_DIROCINV Start Start signal

Start L1 215710_DIROCINV Start L1 L1 phase start signal

Start L2 215715_DIROCINV Start L2 L2 phase start signal

Start L3 215720_DIROCINV Start L3 L3 phase start signal

MeasFwd 215805_DIROCINV MeasFwd Signals measurement in the forwardsdirection.

MeasBwd 215810_DIROCINV MeasBwd Signals measurement in thebackwards direction.

Table 27: BU_OVDT output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip 216105_OVDT TRIP Trip signal

Start 216705_OVDT Start Start signal

Table 28: BU_SYNC output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Permit To Close 217105_SYNC Permit to Close Circuit-breaker closing enable signal

Sync Blocked 217405_SYNC Blocked Function disabled signal

Trig Blocked 217410_SYNC Trig.Blocked Enable output blocked signal

Start 217705_SYNC Start Function pick-up

Sync Override 217805_SYNC Override Synchrocheck bypassed signal

Ampl Diff OK 217810_SYNC Ampl. Diff. OK Amplitude difference in permissiblerange

Phase Diff OK 217815_SYNC Phase Diff. OK Phase-shift in permissible range

Freq Diff OK 217820_SYNC Freq. Diff. OK Frequency difference in permissiblerange

Live Bus OK 217825_SYNC Live Bus OK Busbars energized

Dead Bus OK 217830_SYNC Dead Bus OK Busbars de-energized

Live Line OK 217835_SYNC Live Line OK Line energized

Dead Line OK 217840_SYNC Dead Line OK Line de-energized

Section 3 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSignals

20 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 27: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Table 29: BU_AR output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip 3-Pol 218310_AR Trip 3-Pol Prepare trip of all three phases

Def. Trip 218315_AR Def. Trip Definitive trip

Inhibit Outp 218405_AR Inhibit Output Block for Follower recloser

AR Blocked 218410_AR Blocked Reclosure function blocked

Block to Flwr 218415_AR Block to Flwr. Block Follower CB

Close CB 218605_AR Close CB CB close signal

Close CB2 **) 218610_AR Close CB2 CB2 close signal

AR Ready 218805_AR Ready Reclosure function ready

In Progress 218810_AR In Progress Reclosure cycle running

First AR 1P 218815_AR First AR 1P 1st single-phase reclosure in progress

First AR 3P 218820_AR First AR 3P 1st three-phase reclosure in progress

Second AR 218825_AR Second AR 2nd Reclosure in progress

Third AR 218830_AR Third AR 3rd reclosure in progress

Fourth AR 218835_AR Fourth AR 4th reclosure in progress

Delay Flwr 218840_AR Delay Flwr. Delay Follower CB

ZExtension 218845_AR Z Extension Overreach switching signal

**) 2 denotes the inputs for CB2 in a duplex scheme.

Table 30: BU_DIREFGND output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip 220105_DIREFGND TRIP Trip signal

Receive Inh 220405_DIREFGND ReceiveInh.

Input for Distance function to preventreceiving a PLC signal. To beconnected to input ‘ExtBlkHF’

Start 220705_DIREFGND Start Start signal

MeasFwd 220805_DIREFGND Meas.Forward

Signals measurement in the forwardsdirection.

MeasBwd 220810_DIREFGND Meas.Backward

Signals measurement in thebackwards direction.

Send 220815_DIREFGND Send Signal to be sent to remote end of line

Table 31: BU_I0INV output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip 221105_I0INV TRIP Trip signal

Start 221705_I0INV Start Start signal

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 3Signals

Bay protection functions REB500 21Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 28: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Table 32: BU_LOGIC output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Binary output 222805_LOGIC Binary Output Logic signal (output from logic)

Binary output 222810_LOGIC BINARYOUTPUT

Trip signal (output from trip logic)

Table 33: BU_DELAY output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip 223105_DELAY TRIP Trip signal

Start 223705_DELAY Start Start signal

Table 34: BU_CHKI3PH output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip 224605_CHKI3PH Picked Up Trip signal

Table 35: BU_CHKU3PH output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip 225605_CHKU3PH Picked Up Trip signal

Table 36: BU_OCINST output signals

BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal

Description

Trip 226105_OCINST TRIP Trip signal

Start 226705_OCINST Start Start signal

Section 3 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSignals

22 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 29: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Section 4 System settings

4.1 Voltage transformers for bay protectionGUID-C56299BD-E6CE-4FD3-A0C4-6040FFEAF8D0 v1

The HMI500 Settings/Voltage transformers/Overview tab opens a dialog with the list of allvoltage transformers in the single-line diagram with their labels, bay labels primary andsecondary rated voltages.

In the Details view, the description can be edited in the input field Markings. The ratio isdetermined by the primary and secondary ratings entered in the Transformer ratio input field.The VT input is a single winding, which is suitable for all the main VT secondary ratings, theeffective voltage being set via HMI500 to either 100 V or 200 V. Other voltages areaccommodated by appropriately setting the scaling factor.

This menu item appears only if voltage transformers have been fitted.

17000039-IEC19000402-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000402 V1 EN-US

Figure 1: Settings/Voltage transformers

4.2 Star point setting for bay protectionGUID-E46BBD87-3168-4615-9034-73AC7E11B8E4 v1

If a REB500 bay unit includes bay protection functionality with 3-phase voltagemeasurement, the mode of VT connection 3Phase_Star is mandatory.

Setting example for BP applications:VT data:

UN primary = 220 kV / √3

UN secondary = 110 V / √3

Connection to REB500: 3 phases_star (mandatory connection)

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 4System settings

Bay protection functions REB500 23Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 30: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Settings made in HMI500

VT connection: 3 phases_star (mandatory setting)

Primary voltage: 220,000 V

Secondary voltage: 100 V

Scaling factor: 1.1

4.3 Scaling factor setting for bay protectionGUID-A75CBB73-281A-482A-B09A-C94D9D528700 v1

The scaling factor only applies to the voltage functions and not to distanceprotection.

Section 4 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSystem settings

24 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 31: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Section 5 Bay protection functions

5.1 Distance protection 21 (DIST)

5.1.1 Mode of operationGUID-3308DD58-A1A9-4B83-8EAA-20A7460EF61B v1

Distance protection for the high-speed discriminative protection of long or short overheadlines or cables, double-circuit lines, heavily loaded lines, lines with weak infeeds and what arereferred to as short-zone lines.

The protection is applicable to solidly or low-resistance grounded systems, systems withPetersen coils or to ungrounded systems.

All kinds of faults are detected including close-in three-phase faults, cross-country faults,evolving faults and high-resistance ground faults. The protection remains stable in thepresence of power swings and reversal of energy direction. Switching onto an existing faultresults in instantaneous tripping of the circuit-breaker.

The distance function can also act as backup protection for the power transformer andneighboring lines. Most of the logic described in this section (for example, the transmission ofsignals) is not used for these applications.

5.1.2 FeaturesGUID-C6B602BB-E3EC-46F4-9602-3BF51C578BEE v1

• Overcurrent or underimpedance starters (polygon characteristic)• Directional or non-directional (configurable) underimpedance starters• 5 distance stages (independently set polygon characteristics)• Polygon characteristic with adjustable load discrimination• 6 concurrently computed measuring loops (L1E, L2E, L3E, L1L2, L2L3, L3L1)• Definite time overcurrent backup protection also applicable for protecting short zones (T

zone in 1½ breaker schemes)• VT supervision• Power-swing blocking• Tripping logics for:

• Switch-onto-fault protection• Overreaching zone• Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (also for weak infeed and

communications channel failure)• Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (also for weak infeed, communications

channel failure and reversal of energy direction)• Blocking scheme (also for reversal of energy direction)

5.1.3 Inputs and outputs

5.1.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-27BEC646-2633-467C-8159-5E680C7F3C12 v1

• Three-phase currents• Three-phase voltages• Neutral current

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 25Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 32: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.1.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-D9BCB87F-F715-4676-B9D1-1FC611FFE802 v1

• Reversal of measuring direction• Distance function blocking• Underimpedance starter blocking• Power-swing blocking• Overcurrent backup blocking (O/C backup)• Dead line• Manual CB close• Zone extension• Isolator open• Communication receive• Communication channel failure• Single-phase autoreclosure ready• Tripping condition blocking for the switch-onto-fault protection• Incoming PLC blocking signal• First zone blocking

5.1.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-AB66B1B6-34A5-4616-9197-564DB60CD23A v1

• L1+L2+L3 starters• L1L2L3 starter• L1 starter• L2 starter• L3 starter• E starter• I0 starter• U0 starter• I> starter• Z< starter• Overcurrent backup starter (O/C backup)• Switch-onto-fault starter• Single-phase starter• CB trip• L1L2L3 trip• L1 trip• L2 trip• L3 trip• Three-phase trip• Single-phase trip• Overcurrent backup trip (O/C backup)• Switch-onto-fault trip• Trip with transfer trip signal• Short-zone protection trip• Time ≥ 2nd step• Timer• Zone 2 time• Zone 3 time• Zone 4 time• Final zone time• Measurement• Overreaching measurement• Forwards measurement• Reverse measurement• Weak infeed trip• Distance protection blocked• Power-swing blocking• VT supervision• Delayed VT supervision

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

26 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 33: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

• Communication send• PLC boost• Memory frequency deviation

5.1.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-33AEC56A-BB6F-4D45-99D1-FCD9E3DABA7C v1

• Impedance loop L1E• Impedance loop L2E• Impedance loop L3E• Impedance loop L1L2• Impedance loop L2L3• Impedance loop L3L1

5.1.4 Function settingsGUID-D903B0FE-A515-489B-8473-58E5BD3657D4 v1

Table 37: General

Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting

ParSet 1..4 P1 (Select) X

CT Neutral Bus side (Select) X

Ref. Length ohm/phase 01.000 0.01 30.000 0.001 X

U input CT/VT-Addr. 5 5 5 0

I input CT/VT-Addr. 1 1 1 0

I0 input CT/VT-Addr. 0 0 4 4 X 1)

I0P input CT/VT-Addr. 0 0 4 4 X 1)

I O/C backup IN 000.00 0 10 0.01 X

Delay O/C backup s 005.00 0 10 0.01 X

Time PS block s 000.00 0 10 0.01 X

1) Either one or other of these two inputs (I0, I0P) can be used but not both.

Table 38: Starting

Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting

StartMode UZ (Select) X

PhaseSelMode solid ground (Select) X

GndFaultMode I0 (Select) X

IStart IN 001.00 0.5 10 0.01 X 1)

Imin IN 000.20 0.1 2 0.01 X

3I0min IN 000.20 0.1 2 0.01 X

3U0min UN 000.00 0 2 0.01 X

XA ohm/phase 020.0 0 999 0.1 X

XB ohm/phase -010.0 -999 0 0.1 X

RA ohm/phase 015.0 0 999 0.1 X

RB ohm/phase -010.0 -999 0 0.1 X

RLoad ohm/phase 008.0 0 999 0.1 X

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 27Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 34: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting

AngleLoad deg 40 15 65 1 X

Uweak UN 000.00 0 2 0.01 X

1) IStart is only effective for StartMode = I>.

Table 39: Measurement

Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting

Del (Def) s 002.00 0 10 0.01 X

K0m 1 000.00 0 8 0.01 X

K0m Angle deg 000.00 -90 90 0.01 X

ILoad IN 00.50 0 2 0.10 X

Umin Fault UN 000.05 0.01 2 0.01 X

MemDirMode Trip (Select) X

DefDirMode non-dir (Select) X

BlockZ1 off (Select) X

X(1) ohm/phase 003.00 -300 300 0.01 X

R(1) ohm/phase 001.00 -300 300 0.01 X

RR(1) ohm/phase 003.00 -300 300 0.01 X

RRE(1) ohm/phase 004.00 -300 300 0.01 X

k0(1) 1 000.00 0 8 0.01 X

k0 Angle(1) deg 000.00 -90 90 0.01 X

Delay(1) s 002.00 0 10 0.01 X

X(2) ohm/phase 006.00 -300 300 0.01 X

R(2) ohm/phase 002.00 -300 300 0.01 X

RR(2) ohm/phase 006.00 -300 300 0.01 X

RRE(2) ohm/phase 008.00 -300 300 0.01 X

K0(2) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01 X

K0 Angle(2) deg 000.00 -180 180 0.01 X

Delay(2) s 000.50 0 10 0.01 X

X(3) ohm/phase 010.00 -300 300 0.01 X

R(3) ohm/phase 003.00 -300 300 0.01 X

RR(3) ohm/phase 008.00 -300 300 0.01 X

RRE(3) ohm/phase 010.00 -300 300 0.01 X

K0(3) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01 X

K0 Angle(3) deg 000.00 -180 180 0.01 X

Delay(3) s 001.00 0 10 0.01 X

X(4/OR) ohm/phase 015.00 -300 300 0.01 X

R(4/OR) ohm/phase 004.00 -300 300 0.01 X

RR(4/OR) ohm/phase 010.00 -300 300 0.01 X

RRE(4/OR) ohm/phase 012.00 -300 300 0.01 X

K0(4/OR) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01 X

K0Angle(4/OR) deg 000.00 -180 180 0.01 X

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

28 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 35: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting

Delay(4/OR) s 001.50 0 10 0.01 X

X(Back) ohm/phase -006.00 -300 0 0.01 X

R(Back) ohm/phase -002.00 -300 0 0.01 X

RR(Back) ohm/phase -006.00 -300 0 0.01 X

RRE(Back) ohm/phase -008.00 -300 0 0.01 X

Table 40: VT supervision

Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting

VT Sup Mode off (Select) X

VT Blk Del off (Select) X

VT Sup Deb Del off (Select) X

U0 minVTSup UN 000.20 0.01 0.5 0.01 X

U2 minVTSup UN 000.20 0.01 0.5 0.01 X

I0 minVTSup IN 000.07 0.01 0.5 0.01 X

I2 minVTSup IN 000.07 0.01 0.5 0.01 X

Table 41: Trip schemes

Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting

ComMode off (Select) X

TripMode 1Ph trip (Select) X

SOTFMode off (Select) X

SOTF10sec off (Select) X

Weak off (Select) X

Unblock off (Select) X

Echo off (Select) X

TransBl off (Select) X

t1Block s 000.07 0 0.25 0.01 X

t1TransBl s 000.05 0 0.25 0.01 X

t2TransBl s 003.00 0 10 0.01 X

t1EvolFaults s 003.00 0 10 0.01 X

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 29Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 36: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.1.5 ParametersGUID-94E19491-6E52-44C9-813E-33C133EF4CC3 v1

Table 42: General

Parameter Description

ParSet 1..4 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active.

CT Neutral Side of the CTs on which the star-point is formed (current direction).Choice:

• Bus side• Line side

Ref. Length Reactance (secondary value) to be used as reference length of the line.

U input Indicates the first VT input assigned to the three-phase voltages. Fixed settingChannel 5 of the A/D module.

I input Indicates the first CT input assigned to the three-phase currents. Fixed settingChannel 1 of the A/D module.

I0 input,I0P input

Indicates the CT input assigned to the neutral current. This is used for

• the external acquisition of the neutral current of the line or• the neutral current of the parallel circuit of a double-circuit line. Fixed setting

Channel 4 of the analogue input module.

I O/C backup Phase current pick-up setting of the backup overcurrent unit. The function isblocked when set to zero.

Delay O/C backup Tripping delay of the O/C backup function.

Time PS block Determines the maximum blocking time of the power swing blocking function. Thepower swing blocking function is blocked when set to zero.

Table 43: Starting

Text Explanation

StartMode Choice:

• UZ (underimpedance)• I > (overcurrent)

PhaseSelMode Phase preference for cross-country faults in systems with Petersen coils andungrounded systems:Choice:

• Solidly grounded• L1L3L2 (L1) cyclic• L3L1L2 (L3) cyclic• L1L3L2 acyclic• L1L2L3 acyclic• L3L2L1 acyclic• L3L1L2 acyclic• L2L1L3 acyclic• L2L3L1 acyclic• Directional OR

GndFaultMode Method of detecting ground faults:Choice:

• I0: (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.25 Imax)• I0 OR U0: (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.25 Imax) OR (UE>3U0min)• I0(I2): (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.23 I2)• I0(I2) OR U0: (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.23 I2) OR (UE>3U0min)

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

30 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 37: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Text Explanation

IStart Pick-up setting of the overcurrent starters (only effective providing starting modeset to I>)

Imin Setting of the low current check feature for enabling the protection.

3I0min Neutral current (3I0) setting for detecting ground faults.

3U0min Neutral voltage (3U0) setting for detecting ground faults.

XA Reactive reach of the impedance characteristic in the tripping direction.

XB Reactive reach of the impedance characteristic in the restraint direction.

RA Resistive reach of the impedance characteristic in the tripping direction.

RB Resistive reach of the impedance characteristic in the restraint direction.

RLoad Resistive reach for avoiding load encroachment.

AngleLoad Limit phase-angle for avoiding load encroachment.

Uweak Phase-to-neutral setting for detecting a weak infeed or a dead line for enablingmanually energizing the line. The function is blocked when set to zero.

18000001-IEC19000403-1-en.vsdx

X

R

27°

27°

XA

- XB

RA

- RB

RLoad - RLoad

Directional

(tripping direction)

Load angle

Direc-

tional

OR

IEC19000403 V1 EN-US

Figure 2: Underimpedance starter settings

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 31Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 38: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Table 44: Measurement

Text Explanation

Del (Def) Operating time of the final stage (starter).

K0m Value of the zero-sequence compensation factor for a parallel circuit (ratio of themutual impedance to three times the positive-sequence impedance);

m0 1Z 3 Z. The mutual impedance is not taken into account for a setting

of zero.

K0mAngle Phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor for a parallel circuit

m0 1Z 3 ZArg

ILoad The inclination of the characteristic changes from 7° to 14° when the load currentexceeds the setting of ILoad.

ILoad = 0.01..1.99 IN Switches as described

ILoad = 0 Constant inclination of 14°

ILoad = 2 Constant inclination of 7°

UminFault Minimum voltage at which the fault voltage is used for determining fault direction.

MemDirMode Procedure to be followed after decay of the memory voltage and no voltage isavailable for measurement:

• Blocks• Trips• Conditional trip

Only trips, if the directions during the present and the preceding times steps are inopposition.

DefDirMode Response at the end of the final time step (definitive time):

• Non-direct.: Trips for faults in both directions• Forwards: Trips only for faults in the forwards direction

BlockZ1 Zone 1 measurement blocking:

• off• on

X(n) Pick-up line reactance for Zone (n):

• X < 0 for restraint direction• X = 0 disables the zone (Zone 1 cannot be disabled)

R(n) Pick-up line resistance for Zone (n); the sign must be the same as for X (n).

RR(n) Resistive reach (incl. arc resistance) of Zone (n) for phase faults; the sign must bethe same as for X (n).

RRE(n) Resistive reach (incl. arc resistance) of Zone (n) for ground faults; the sign must bethe same as for X (n).

K0(n) Value of the zero-sequence compensation factor for E/F’s in Zone (n);

0 1 13Z Z Z .

K0Angle(n) Phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor for E/F’s in Zone (n);

0 1 13Arg Z Z Z

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

32 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 39: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Text Explanation

Delay(n) Operating time for Zone (n).

X(BACK) Pick-up line reactance for the reverse zone:X = 0 Zone disabled.

R(BACK) Pick-up line resistance for the reverse zone.

RR(BACK) Resistive reach for phase faults in the reverse zone.

RRE(BACK) Resistive reach for ground faults in the reverse zone.

18000002--1-en.vsdx

R

14°

X(n)

R(n) RR(n) RRE(n) - X(n)/8

- RR(n)/2

- RRE(n)/2

27°

27°

X

IEC19000404 V1 EN-US

Figure 3: Distance measurement settings

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 33Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 40: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000003--1-en.vsdx

14°

R

X

27°

27°

- RRE(BACK) - RR(BACK) - R(BACK)

- X(BACK)

X(BACK)/8

RR(BACK)/2

RRE(BACK)/2

IEC19000405 V1 EN-US

Figure 4: Reverse zone settings

18000004--1-en.vsdx

S1

X

S2

S3

S4

SR

Starter, resp. Final zone (Delay (Def))

R

IEC19000406 V1 EN-US

Figure 5: Starting and distance measurement characteristic

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

34 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 41: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Table 45: VT supervision

Text Explanation

VTSupBlkMode off: Function disabled

ZeroSeq:

0 0U I

NegSeq:

2 2U I

Zero × NegSeq:

0 0 2 2U I U I

Special:

2 0 2U I I

VTSupBlkDel Delayed blocking of the distance function (12 s) for operation of the VTsupervision.

• off immediate blocking• on delayed blocking

VTSupDebDel Delay (1 s) for resetting blocking by the VT supervision.

• off immediate reset• on delayed reset

U0min VTSup Pick-up setting of the neutral voltage (U0) for VT supervision referred to therated VT voltage 100/√3 or 200/√3.

U2min VTSup Pick-up setting of the negative sequence voltage (U2) for VT supervisionreferred to the rated VT voltage 100/√3 or 200/√3.

I0min VTSup Pick-up setting of the neutral current (I0) for VT supervision.

I2min VTSup Pick-up setting of the NPS current (I2) for VT supervision.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 35Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 42: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Table 46: Trip schemes

Text Explanation

ComMode Type of transfer tripping scheme:

• off• PUTT NONDIR• PUTT FWD• PUTT OR2• POTT• BLOCK OR

TripMode Type of tripping (single or three-phase):

• 1PhTrip: single-phase tripping (for single-phase autoreclosure)• 3PhTrip: three-phase tripping in all cases• 3PhTripDel3: single-phase tripping (for single-phase autoreclosure) up to the

end of Delay (3), then three-phase tripping

SOTFMode Operating mode of the switch-onto-fault function:

• off• Non-dir: non-directional underimpedance starting (recommended setting)• Forward OR2: directional with overreaching (Zone 2, if over- reaching

disabled) or non-directional after decay of any memory voltage

SOFT10sec Enables the 10 s delay for the switch-onto-fault function:

• off (t = 200 ms)• on (t = 10 s)

Weak Enables the Weak infeed logic for the PUTT or POTT transfer tripping modes(Uweak must also be set):

• off• on

Unblock Enables the deblocking logic:

• off• on (only suitable for PLC)

Echo Enables the Echo logic for the POTT transfer tripping mode:

• off• on

TransBl Enables the Transient blocking logic (stabilization for reversal of power directionon double-circuit lines) for the POTT and BLOCK OR (overreaching blockingscheme) transfer tripping modes:

• off• on

t1Block Waiting time for signal receive for the BLOCK OR (overreaching blocking scheme).

t1TransBl Time 1 for the TRANSBL (transient blocking) mode. Delay for faults after a fault wasdetected in the reverse direction.

t2TransBl Time 2 for the TRANSBL (transient blocking) mode. The logic remains enabled forthe time t2 after a fault was detected in the reverse direction.

t1EvolFaults Time for discriminating evolving faults (three-phase trip for evolving faults duringthis time setting)

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

36 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 43: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.1.6 Configuration

5.1.6.1 GeneralGUID-4860E469-1FF3-441D-B6B9-C6A13A87149D v1

The first parameter in the sub-menu General is Ref length. It is used to display the faultdistance when the function trips and has no influence of the protection function itself. Theparameter states the reactance of the reference length (in secondary Ω/ph per unit length)and may be set to display km, miles, percent line length and so on, that is,

.Distanceref. length

measX

For example,

• To display fault distance in kmSecondary reactance per km = 0.2 Ω/phaseRef. length = 0.2 Ω/phase

• To display fault distance in % of line lengthSecondary reactance of the line = 25 Ω/phase (1% = 0.25 Ω/phase)Ref. length = 0.25 Ω/phase

The setting of the parameter CT neutral depends on whether the star-point of the main CTs ison the line side or the busbar side. There are thus two possible settings Bus side or Line side.The Line side option is the one to choose, providing the protection is connected according tothe wiring diagram in the appendix.

The parameter Analogue inputs determines whether the neutral current isconnected to an analogue input (setting I0 input) or is derived internally. Theinformation icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.

5.1.6.2 StartersGUID-3570AA0F-8DE9-46B0-B18F-21CFB453AF53 v1

The distance function provides for two methods of starting, that is, overcurrent orunderimpedance. The desired method is selected by appropriately setting the parameterStartMode in the STARTERS sub-menu.

Depending on the setting of the parameter DefDirMode, a starter can also trip on its own afterthe time Delay (Def).

Overcurrent startersGUID-EE5ECD9D-422E-46A4-A02A-E7D61151EFD5 v1

The overcurrent starters are enabled by selecting OC for the parameter StartMode. The pick-up level of the overcurrent starters is determined by the setting of the parameter IStart. Thecorresponding setting range is from 0.5 to 10 IN, in steps of 0.01 IN. The setting of IStart mustbe sufficiently above the maximum load current to avoid any risk of mal-operation undernormal load conditions. Note that all currents greater than 80% of the highest phase current(and also the enabling current Imin) are taken into account by the phase selection function.When determining the maximum load current it must be considered that:

• In the case of a double-circuit line, the load current IB can briefly reach double its normalvalue when one circuit is tripped.

• Ground faults can cause additional balancing currents IA in the healthy phases.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 37Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 44: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

It is important for an overcurrent starter, which has picked up, to reliably reset at themaximum load current IBmax, if for example the fault is tripped by a downstream protection.Taking due account of the reset ratio of 0.95, the lowest permissible setting is given by:

max

min( ) 1.250.95

B A

N

I IIstart

I

The maximum setting (IStart)max is derived from the minimum fault current IK for a fault atthe end of the next section of line:

max min( ) K NIstart I I

Should the above relationships result in (IStart)max being lower than (IStart)min, theunderimpedance starters must be used instead.

Underimpedance startersGUID-AB1404EC-2679-4CA9-AA8B-F84A320C432E v1

The underimpedance starters are enabled by selecting UZ as the StartMode parameter. Thefollowing parameters then have to be set:

• XA• XB• RA• RB• RLoad• AngleLoad

The parameters RLoad and AngleLoad define the permissible load area.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

38 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 45: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000005--1-en.vsdx

X

AngleLoad

XA

XB

RA

RB

RLoad

-RLoad

R

IEC19000407 V1 EN-US

Figure 6: Underimpedance starting characteristic

Because of the method used to represent impedances by the processor program, theimpedance settings should not be set higher than necessary, otherwise the resolution for lowimpedances will be reduced.

Minimum permissible reach of the underimpedance starters

The starting units must reliably pick-up for a fault towards the end of the next section of line(backup zone). If the backup protection of the adjacent section of line is not necessary, thestarters must be set to at least 1.3 times the impedance of the protected line. In the case ofshort lines, fault resistance becomes a factor to be taken into account.

Maximum permissible reach of the underimpedance starters

• The setting must take account of the considerable increase in the load current of thehealthy circuit of a double-circuit line, when a fault on one circuit is tripped.

• To ensure that the phase selection is correct for single-phase autoreclosure, the startersin the healthy phases must not pick up for a ground fault on one of the phases (in spite ofany balancing currents which may occur).

The resulting limits are as follows:

• Solidly grounded systems

max

Ω/ph2 ( )set

B A

UZ

I I

• Ungrounded systems or system with Petersen coils

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 39Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 46: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

max

Ω/ph2 1.25

Vset

B

UZ

I

where:

• Zset is the maximum value of the impedance, that is, the maximum value of the expression:

2 2 2 2 or XA RA XB RB

• U is the lowest phase voltage of the healthy phases for aground fault on one phase (U =0.85 × min. system voltage). The factor 0.85 takes account of a negligibly small zero-sequence source impedance.

• Uv is the lowest phase-to-phase system voltage.• 1.25 is the safety factor• 2 is the factor, which takes account of the fact that phase currents and not phase-to-

phase currents are used.

These requirements are generally fulfilled for most applications. If the first inequality is notsatisfied, the right-hand side must be expressed vectorially and compared with theunderimpedance starting characteristic in relation to the setting RLoad. The healthy phasesmust be checked for the case of a ground fault.

Current release (low-current check)GUID-73E85CC0-A645-4715-B6C2-D4A775931D71 v1

For a phase to be included in the phase selection, it must be conducting a current higher thanImin. A typical setting is 0.2 IN.

Ground fault detectorGUID-052C389C-6C20-4342-BD93-8C51FCC560F8 v1

There are five alternative methods of detecting ground faults; the desired one shall beselected by the setting of the parameter GndFaultMode. The neutral current can either be usedon its own or in conjunction with the neutral voltage. The following operating modes areavailable:

• I0: (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.25 Imax)• I0 OR U0: (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.25 Imax) OR (UE > 3U0min)• I0 AND U0: (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.25 Imax) OR (UE > 3 U0min)• I0(I2): (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.23 I2)• I0(I2) OR U0 : (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.23 I2) OR (UE > 3U0min)

The criterion for the highest 3I0min setting is:

• The ground fault detector must pick up for all ground faults within the reach of theunderimpedance starters in solidly grounded power systems and all cross-country faultsin ungrounded or impedance grounded power systems.

The criteria for the lowest 3I0min setting are:

• The ground fault detector must not pick up for a ground fault on ungrounded systems orsystems with Petersen coils

• The ground fault detector must not pick up for phase faults, although CT errors can causefalse neutral currents.

The recommended setting is 3I0min = 0.5 IN.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

40 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 47: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Should it not be possible to find a setting, which satisfies both theseconditions, the neutral voltage (3U0min) must be used for measurement inaddition to the neutral current.

Phase preference logicGUID-C3BD8775-B46E-437E-B3B9-F082CFAB583E v1

The desired phase preference logic for cross-country faults is chosen with the aid of theparameter PhaseSelMode.

In solidly grounded systems, the PhaseSelMode parameter is disabled by setting it to Solidground or Forward OR.

It is essential for all the relays in ungrounded systems and systems with Petersen coils to beset to the same phase preference logic. The logic used in the system must be known beforeone of the eight alternative schemes can be selected:

• L1L3L2(L1) — cyclic• L3L1L2(L3) — cyclic• L1L3L2 — acyclic• L1L2L3 — acyclic• L3L2L1 — acyclic• L3L1L2 — acyclic• L2L1L3 — acyclic• L2L3L1 — acyclic

Undervoltage starters (Uweak)GUID-2E537DE1-4FD1-476E-A15F-3F0354C6C425 v1

The undervoltage starters are used in conjunction with the switch-onto-fault function and thetransfer tripping schemes (POTT and PUTT NONDIR). The corresponding pick-up value is set inrelation to the rated voltage with the aid of the parameter Uweak, which has a setting range of0 to 2 UN in steps of 0.01.

5.1.6.3 MeasurementGUID-1C206723-EE56-4815-829C-56FD2084967D v1

All the settings for the impedance measuring zones are to be found in the Measurement sub-menu.

Determining the distance zonesGUID-05267329-6581-44F6-A236-96D275BADFAC v1

Before it is possible to determine the reaches of the distance zones, the impedances andphase-angles of the line sections during faults must be known. Typical settings for the variouszone reaches along the line are given below:

18000006-IEC19000408-1-en.vsdx

A B C

a b

1

2

3 Z = 0.85 (a + k · b )

b

b

2

Z = 0.85 (a + k · b ) 2 1

Z = 0.85 · a 1

Z = 1.2 · a ÜR

IEC19000408 V1 EN-US

Figure 7: Typical settings for the reaches of distance relay zones

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 41Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 48: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

where:

• Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4 are the impedance reach of the various zones (Ω/ph).• ZOR is the impedance reach of the overreaching zone (Ω/ph).• k ≥ 1 is the factor to take the apparent increase of line impedance seen by a relay due to an

intermediate infeed into account.• a, b are the impedance of the corresponding section of line (Ω).

Example for calculating k:

Check the overreach for k > 1 if the infeed B is not in operation.

18000007-IEC19000409-1-en.vsdx

A B C

D

3 2 1 4

5

IA' + IB'

IA' ~ ~

IEC19000409 V1 EN-US

Figure 8: Calculation of k

' '

1A B

A

I Ik

I

where:

• IA' is the maximum fault current possible• IB' is the minimum fault current possible• 1...5 are the distance relays

Calculating the secondary line impedances

The primary values calculated from the grading table for the line impedances have to beconverted to secondary values. These are obtained by applying the following relationship:

LP LPLS

ZU

I

Z ZZ

KK

K

where:

• ZLp is the primary positive-sequence line impedance.• ZLs is the secondary positive-sequence line impedance.• KU is the main VT ratio.• KI is the main CT ratio.• KZ is the impedance ratio.

The same applies to the conversion of the resistances and reactances.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

42 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 49: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

The impedance characteristic is defined independently for each of the four distance zones(Zone 4 is used alternatively for the overreaching zone) by the following parameters (i = 1 to 4):

• X — (i)• R — (i)• RR — (i)• RRE — (i)• k0 — (i)• k0Ang — (i)• Delay — (i)

18000008-IEC19000410-1-en.vsdx

X

R

14°

X

RRE R RR - X/8

-RRE/2

-RR/2

27°

27°

IEC19000410 V1 EN-US

Figure 9: Distance measuring characteristic

Impedance setting ranges:

• X -10 to 20 Ω/phase in steps of 0.01• R -300 to 300 Ω/phase in steps of 0.01• RR -10 to 15 Ω/phase in steps of 0.01• RRE -10 to 15 Ω/phase in steps of 0.01

When X of a zone is set to zero, regardless of the settings of its other parameters, this zoneand all following zones with the exception of the final zone are blocked. For example if zone X(3) is set to zero, zones 3 and 4 are blocked. If in the present example the user wants to blockjust zone 3, this can be achieved indirectly by setting zone 3 to all the settings determined forzone 4 and blocking zone 4 by setting X (4) = 0 (that is, zone 3 functions as zone 4). Zone 1 canonly be disabled by the parameter Block Z1 or the binary input ExtBlock Z1.

The direction of measurement is reversed for negative settings of X, R, RR and RRE.

Allowing for arc resistance:

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 43Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 50: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

The settings RRE and RR make provision for fault resistance in ground fault and phase-to-phase fault loops. The setting takes the ground fault resistance comprising the arc resistanceand the pylon footing resistance in relation to the line resistance into account.

Typical settings lie in the range RR(E)/X = 0.5...3.

The arc resistance RB can be calculated according to A.R. van C. Warrington as follows:

1.4

28700B

dRI

• d is the length of arc in m.• I is the current in A.• RB is the arc resistance in Ω.

Since the unit is Ω/ph, the fault resistance appears differently in the impedance planeaccording to the type of fault. Where the value of the fault resistance RF in Ω is known, it hasto be entered in the R/X diagram as follows:

phase-to-groundfault: F 0R R / 1 k

phase-to-phase fault: FR R / 2

three-phase fault: FR R / 3

It is for this reason that fault resistance is compensated individually the parameters RRE andRR. The parameter RR will generally be set lower than RRE, because the phase-to-phase faultresistance is normally very low.

R F

R F R

F R

F

R F

Phase to ground fault

Phase to phase fault

Three phase fault

18000009-IEC19000411-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000411 V1 EN-US

Figure 10: Faults with arc resistance

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

44 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 51: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Load discrimination

The load area defined by the underimpedance parameters RLoad and AngleLoad is taken intoaccount by starting and measuring characteristics. The distance function can only trip, if thefault impedance lies within the underimpedance starting characteristic.

S4

S1

S2

S3

SR

Starting

R

X

18000010-IEC19000412-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000412 V1 EN-US

Figure 11: Load discrimination

The load impedance area is only formed when the underimpedance starter (UZ)is in operation. It does not exist when starting is provided by the overcurrentstarter (OC).

Zero-sequence compensation of the protected line

The magnitude and phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor are set individuallyfor each zone using parameters k0 and k0Ang. The k0 factors are calculated from the positive-sequence impedance ZL and the zero-sequence impedance Z0L of the line:

00

( )1/ 3 L L

L

Z Zk x

Z

00 1/ 3 ( ) / )L L Lk x Z Z Z

Range: 0 to 8 in steps of 0.01

0 0 0arctan ( ) / ( ) arctan ( / )L L L L L Lk Ang X X R R X R

Range: -180° to +90° in steps of 0.01

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 45Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 52: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Zero-sequence compensation of double-circuit lines

The magnitude and phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor for a double-circuit line are set using parameters k0m and k0mAng. This compensation only applies toZones 1 and 2, the overreaching zone and the reverse zone.

Directional unit

Each distance zone has its own directional measuring unit. The voltage used for measurementdepends on the amplitude of the fault voltage in relation to the parameter UminFault. Thefault voltage is used, providing it is higher than the setting of UminFault and a voltage derivedfrom the healthy voltage and the memory voltage is used when it falls below. Therecommended settings are 0.1 UN for conventional VTs.

Should correct determination of direction not be possible (reference voltage too low ormemory voltage decayed), the setting of the parameter MemDirMode determines whether theprotection blocks or trips:

• Block — Protection blocks all zones (definitive zone only if directional)• Trip — Protection trips• Cond. trip — Protection blocks unless the instantaneous and preceding zones are in

opposite directions, in which case the protection trips.

Overreaching zone (OR)GUID-9E13EFC1-370B-4EC2-A33B-72FB1A9E9C5B v1

The settings including the designation 4/OR (X (4/OR) delay (4/OR)) can be used either for afourth measuring zone or a completely independent overreaching zone (but not for both at thesame time) by appropriately setting the parameter Delay (4/OR).

In applications requiring a fourth zone, the measuring unit of the second zone is used foroverreaching. An overreaching zone is necessary for the switch-onto-fault and zone extensionlogics and for overreaching transfer tripping schemes.

Reverse zone (BACK)GUID-5C7E7430-152E-46A3-9CA7-2CEC0AE6519B v1

A reverse measuring zone is used in a blocking scheme and also the logic for detecting areversal of fault energy direction. It is set using the parameters X (BACK), R (BACK), RR (BACK)and RRE (BACK) which have setting ranges from 0 to 300 Ω/ph.

Note that:

• for underimpedance starting (UZ):With the exception of the load discrimination defined by the parameters RLoad andAngleLoad, the reverse zone operates independently of the starters.

• for overcurrent starting (OC):The reverse zone is only in operation when an overcurrent starter (IStart) has picked up.

• The binary input (Ext Blk UZ) blocks operation regardless of the starter mode for thereverse zone.

• Signal output: Meas Bward• Measurement of the reverse zone only takes place while the first zone is active, that is, the

Meas Bward signal resets at the latest at the end the second time step.

Time steps (Delay)GUID-74E9FA23-CFF7-4A68-A9A9-68480D59B009 v1

The operating time of every activated distance zone (parameter X <> 0) is determined by theparameter Delay, which has a setting range of 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.01. The parameter Delay(4/OR) is also associated with a logic, which determines whether it applies to Zone 4 or to theoverreaching zone, that is, if Delay (4/OR) < Delay (2), it applies to the overreaching zone,otherwise to Zone 4.

The set times must satisfy the following relationships:

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

46 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 53: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

• Delay (1) < Delay (2) < Delay (3) < Delay (4) < Delay(Def)• Delay (OR) < Delay (2)

When grading the operating times of several distance relays, the minimum grading timeshould not be less than the sum of the circuit-breaker operating time plus 150 ms (reset time +operating time of the measuring system + safety margin).

Recommended timer settings:

• Zone 1: normally instantaneous• Zone 2: Delay (2) is normally set to the sum of relay and circuit breaker operating times,

arc extinction time, signal transmission time and a tolerance margin, which amounts toabout 0.25 to 0.5 s. The tolerance includes an allowance for sequential trip-ping.

• Zone 3: Delay (3) is set to about 2 × Delay (2).• Zone 4: Delay (4) or Delay(Def) is normally set to at least 4 × Delay (2).

Special cases may require settings, which deviate considerably from the aboverecommendations.

The time steps of zones (1 to 4) must have settings less than Delay(Def).

5.1.6.4 Definitive zone (Def)GUID-42A75BFC-871D-41BB-A9C0-327B47EE2AB2 v1

The definitive (or fifth) zone is subject to the same parameters as the underimpedancestarters (that is, XA, XB, RA, RB, RLoad and AngleLoad).

The corresponding time step is defined by the parameter Delay (Def).

18000011-IEC19000413-1-en.vsdx

X

Load Angle

XA

-XB

RA

-RB

RLoad

-RLoad

R

27o

27o

(In tripping

direction)

IEC19000413 V1 EN-US

Figure 12: Definitive zone characteristic

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 47Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 54: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

The parameter DefDirMode determines the response at the end of the definitive time. It can beset to be either directional (in tripping direction) or non-directional.

There is still a definitive zone even using the overcurrent starter (OC), but onlywith respect to the parameters Delay (Def) and DefDirMode.

5.1.6.5 Backup overcurrent unit (O/C Backup Protection)GUID-20B5299D-4AF0-474F-A39C-5B2CEC91FFB8 v1

The settings for the backup overcurrent unit are made via the sub-menu O/C BACKUPPROTECTION. The setting of the parameter I O/C determines the pick-up level, which can bechosen in steps of 0.1 IN between 0 and 10 IN. The associated time delay is set in steps of 0.1 sbetween 0 and 10 s by means of the parameter Delay O/C.

The pick-up signal of the overcurrent unit is also used by the STUB protection. If the function isbeing used for this purpose, that is, the binary I/P Isol open is at logical 1, the tripping time isfixed at 25 ms.

5.1.6.6 VT supervisionGUID-251A8D53-AFE5-46E8-A370-18F24C8A0401 v1

The parameters for setting the VT supervision function are located in the sub-menu VTSUPERVISON. One of four different operating modes can be selected by using VTSupMode.The function processes zero and negative-sequence components, which are either used ontheir own (ZeroSeq and NegSeq) or combined (Zero×NegSeq and Spec).

ZeroSeq0 0U I

NegSeq2 2U I

Zero×NegSeq 0 0 2 2U I U I

Spec 2 0 2U I I

The four pick-up values are the settings of the parameters U0min VTSup, U2min VTSup, I0minVTSup and I2min VTSup. They can be set between 0 and 2 UN (or IN) in steps of 0.01. The basicsettings are 0.2 UN for the voltage and 0.07 IN for the current.

Only the NegSeq or Spec options are available in ungrounded systems.

Upon operating, the VT supervision function is normally required to immediately block thedistance protection function. Provision is made, however, for blocking the distance functionafter a delay of 12 s by setting the parameter VTSupBlkDel. This parameter is normally set incases where only the overcurrent starters are in use.

If the VT supervision function remains picked up for longer than 12 s, it resets only after a delay(1 s). Should a fault give rise to zero or negative-sequence current components, it resetsimmediately.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

48 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 55: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

The parameter VTSupDebDel (deblocking) enables the reset delay to be continuously enabledregardless of current.

Table 47: Recommended setting

Parameter Grounded system Ungrounded system

VTSupDebDel enabled disabled

The signal VTSup indicates that the distance function is being blocked by the VT supervisionand VTSupDel that the 12 s delay is running.

5.1.6.7 Tripping logicGUID-09BA469C-565E-49EF-B2C0-080319525FA6 v1

The Trip Schemes tab gives access to the parameters for determining the tripping logic.

The various transfer tripping schemes are selected by setting the parameter ComMode (3 xPUTT, POTT and OVERREACHING BLOCKING schemes). The possible settings are given below.The settings for the respective scheme only appear after the appropriate communicationmode has been selected.

PUTT NONDIR

Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (non-directional)

Weak enables the weak infeed logic.

PUTT FWD

Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (in line direction)

No other parameters.

PUTT OR2

Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (overreaching zone/Zone 2)

Unblock selects the enabling logic for communications channel failure.

POTT

Permissive overreaching transfer tripping

• Weak enables the weak infeed logic.• Unblock selects the enabling logic for communications channel failure. Echo enables the

echo logic.• TransBl enables the logic for reversal of fault energy.• t1TransBl tripping signal duration by the wrong energy direction logic.• t2TransBl max. operating time of the wrong energy direction logic.

BLOCK OR

Blocking scheme

• TransBl enables the logic for reversal of fault energy.• t1Block time allowed for the receipt of a PLC signal.• t1TransBl tripping signal duration by the wrong energy direction logic.• t2TransBl max. operating time of the wrong energy direction logic.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 49Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 56: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

TripMode

Depending on the setting of the parameter TripMode:

• tripping is phase-selective, controlled by the binary input 1PolAR (for 1phTrip), alwaysthree-phase (for 3phTrip)

• tripping is three-phase after the time Delay (3) (for 3phTripDel3)

SOTF Mode

Access is gained to the switch-onto-fault logic settings by selecting the parameter SOTFMode. The alternatives presented are whether the switch-onto-fault logic should trip on thebasis of the non-directional underimpedance starters or the overreaching zone.

This logic is enabled either by the undervoltage function delayed by 10 s or 200 ms or thebinary inputs Deadline and Manual close.

Two signaling outputs Start SOTF and Trip SOTF are associated with the switch-onto-faultlogic. Start SOTF is intended for blocking the autoreclosure function and Trip SOTF signalsthat tripping was by the switch-onto-fault logic.

SOTF 10 sec

The parameter SOTF10sec determines whether the undervoltage function and the binary inputDeadline are enabled after 10 s (on) or 200 ms (off). off indicates switching onto a fault afterfast autoreclosure (Fast AR). Tripping in this case is thus based on the decisions of thestarters alone.

t1EvolFaults

The setting of the parameter t1EvolFaults determines the time during which the detection ofan evolving fault causes a three-phase trip.

5.1.6.8 Power-swing blockingGUID-290AFE08-EF8B-49ED-BB97-D443777923B7 v1

Only the parameter tPSblock for the time during which the power-swing blocking signal ismaintained has to be set in the POWER-SWING BLOCKING sub-menu. The setting range is 0 to10 s in steps of 0.01. Tripping is enabled again at the latest at the end of this time.

The power-swing blocking function is disabled when tPSblock is set to zero or a logical 1 isapplied to the binary input Ext Blk PSB.

5.1.6.9 Supplementary information for binary inputsGUID-1BA1A03D-546C-4875-8F2C-AC972DAE2406 v1

ChgMeasDir

Applying a signal to this input reverses the direction of measurement for the entire distanceprotection function (all zones).

Ext Blk Dist

This input blocks the entire distance protection function. Blocking is signaled by Dist blockedand after 12 s by DelDistBlk. Only the backup overcurrent protection (I O/C) then remainsactive.

Ext UZ Blk

This input blocks the underimpedance starters, the neutral voltage starter (U0), themeasurement for Weak and the reverse measurement. The overcurrent starters (OC) remain inoperation.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

50 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 57: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Ext Blk PSB

This input blocks the power-swing blocking function.

Ext Blk O/C backup

This input blocks the backup overcurrent protection (O/C Back-up Protection).

Deadline

The signal applied to this input is needed by the switch-onto-fault logic to indicate to thedistance function that the line is dead before the circuit-breaker is closed. It is used for theswitch-onto-fault logic providing the VTs are on the busbars.

Manual Close

Prior to manually closing the circuit-breaker, this signal enables the switch-onto-fault logic andblocks the VT supervision function.

ZExtension, ZExtensionAR

The overreaching logic permits instantaneous tripping within the overreaching zone. It isenabled via the binary input ZExtension or ZExtensionAR. For this purpose, the outputZExtension of the autoreclosure function is connected to the input ZExtensionAR.

Isol open

This input is required by the STUB protection to ascertain whether an isolator is open or not.

ComRec

This input is needed for the external signal ComRec (signal received by PLC, optical fiber link orpoint-to-point radio).

ComFail

This input signals to the protection that the PLC channel has failed.

1PolAR

This input permits single-phase tripping to take place and is used in conjunction with single orthree-phase autoreclosure schemes.

See Section 5.8 for the connection to the autoreclosure function.

ExtBlkSOTF

This input is needed in cases where the switch-onto-fault logic is not enabled after anautoreclosure. See Section 5.8 for the connection to the autoreclosure function.

ExtBlkHF

This input blocks the reception of an intertripping signal. It is used for coordinatingcommunication channel signals when in a solidly grounded system, the distance protectionand the E/F protection use the same channel. It must be connected to the RecBlk signal of theground fault function.

ExtBlock Z1

This input blocks measurement in zone 1.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 51Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 58: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.1.7 Technical description

5.1.7.1 Starters

Starting procedureGUID-98795D77-46E5-4F07-B61F-214818EBAD2C v1

The REB500sys distance function is equipped with either over-current or underimpedancestarters. The setting of the parameter StartMode determines which of the two is active.

A starter must pick up at least twice before its signal is processed (for phase selection,starting timers, signaling etc.). Should a starter pick up only sporadically, only the backwardsmeasuring system and ancillary functions such as displaying measurements etc. are enabled.

Starting signals do not reset unless all the starters have reset.

Overcurrent starters (Istart)GUID-6F77DAB8-B663-4091-872B-A2B590008022 v1

The variables at the inputs of the overcurrent starters are the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 andthe residual current IE (3I0), respectively the neutral voltage UE (3U0). Firstly, a logic determinesImax, that is, the highest of the three-phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3.

If the value of Imax exceeds the setting of the parameter IStart (overcurrent starters), each ofthe phase currents Iph is checked to determine whether it exceeds the setting of the parameterImin (current enable) and also 80% of Imax.

In the case of the ground current IE, it is checked whether it exceeds the setting of theparameter 3I0min and also 25% of Imax. Depending on the setting of the parameter And FaultMode (I0, I0 AND U0, I0 OR U0), it is checked at the same time whether the residual voltage UEhas exceeded the setting of the parameter 3U0min (neutral voltage enable).

The logical signals L1, L2, L3 and E are accordingly set to logical 0 or logical 1. The kind of faultand the phases involved are thus determined. This information is needed for

• phase selection (determination of the loop to be measured)• signaling the kind of fault (signaling relays, LEDs etc.)• enabling signals for tripping and for starting the timers for the measuring zones

The starting signals reset if after measurement, the impedances of all six loops lie outside thefinal impedance zone (if only the overcurrent starters are in operation, there is nounderimpedance starting characteristic and relay response is determined by the setting of theovercurrent starter IStart).

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

52 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 59: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

START

N

N

Y

Imax > Istart

signal ph (L1, L2, L3)

set log.

signal E

END

AND

Y

Y

N

Y

N

IL1, IL2, IL3, IE, UE

Imax = highest value of IL1, IL2, IL3

Iph > Imin

Iph > 0.8 Imax

set log.

All phase currentsIL1, IL2, IL3

[(IE ≥ 3I0min) AND (IE ≥ 0.25Imax)]

AND/OR(UE ≥ 3U0min)

18000012-IEC19000414-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000414 V1 EN-US

Figure 13: Overcurrent starters (IStart)

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 53Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 60: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Underimpedance starters (UZ) up to initial pick-upGUID-69036925-0AA6-488C-A93E-410F5C113C09 v1

The variables at the inputs of the underimpedance starters are the phase currents IL1, IL2 andIL3 and the residual current IE (3I0) and the phase-to-neutral voltages UL1, UL2, UL3 and theneutral voltage UE (3U0).

UL1, UL2, UL3, UE, IL1, IL2, IL3, IE

START

(IE > 3I0min) AND (IE>0.25Imax) AND/OR (UE>3U0min)

(Iph > Imin

UPh Z = ----------- 2 x IPh

Z < Z Start

Set temp. signals “Ph”,

“E”

All Ph-0 loops

Loop = Phase selection

Uph Uph1 – Uph2 Z = ------------------- or Z = ------------------- 1x Iph + 1 x IE Iph1 – Iph2

Z < ZStart

Log.signals = temp.signals

END

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

(Iph1 > Imin) AND

(Iph2 > Imin

Uph1 – Uph2 Z = --------------------- Iph1 – Iph2

Z < Z Start

Set temp. signals “Ph1”,

“Ph2”

All Ph-Ph loops

Selectivity conditions

Set log. signals

N

Y

J

N

Y

18000013-IEC19000415-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000415 V1 EN-US

Figure 14: Underimpedance starters (UZ)

Depending on the setting of the parameter Gnd Fault Mode (I0, I0 AND U0, I0 OR U0), thefunction determines initially whether one or both of the ground fault criteria are fulfilled, thatis, whether the residual current IE exceeds the setting of the parameter 3I0min and/or theresidual voltage UE the setting of the parameter 3U0min. Should this be the case, the threephase-to-ground loops are measured first, otherwise just the three phase-to-phase loops.

The three phase-to-ground loops are processed as follows:

If IL1 (or IL2, or IL3) is greater than Imin, the corresponding loops are enabled and the loopimpedances calculated as follows:

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

54 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 61: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

11

1

LL

L

UZI

(uncompensated)

22

22L

LL

UZI

(uncompensated)

33

3

LL

L

UZI

(uncompensated)

All uncompensated impedances ZL1, ZL2 and ZL3 are compared with the starting characteristicand temporarily set the logical signals Ph and E (no display). An impedance loop is selected onthe basis of these signals (loop = selected phase).

Phase-ground-loop

For a phase-ground-loop, the impedance is calculated with a compensation factor k0 = 1:

Ph 0

Ph 0Ph E

UZ

I 1 I

For example:

L

L

1L10

1 E

UZ

I 1 I

Phase-to-phase loop

For a phase-to-phase loop, the impedance is calculated using phase-to-phase variables:

Ph PhPh Ph

Ph Ph

UZ

I

For example:

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 55Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 62: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

1 21 2

1 2

L LL L

L L

U UZ

I I

If the impedance (Z) calculated for the loop determined by the phase selection logic lies withinthe underimpedance starting characteristic (Zstart), the loop is used for measurement.

The logical signals are needed for:

• signaling the kind of fault (signaling relays, LEDs etc.)• enabling signals for tripping• starting the timers for the measuring zones

The three phase-to-phase loops are processed as follows:

Providing Iph1 and Iph2 (IL1 and IL2, IL2 and IL3, or IL3 and IL1) are higher than Imin, thecorresponding loops are enabled and the impedances are calculated as follows:

1 21 2

1 2

L LL L

L L

U UZ

I I

1 21 2

1 2

L LL L

L L

U UZ

I I

3 13 1

3 1

L LL L

L L

U UZ

I I

Comparison of the three starting impedances eliminates the healthy loops (selectivitycondition).

If just one of the loop impedances lies within the underimpedance starting characteristic(Zstart), only the signals (L1 and L2), or (L2 and L3), or (L3 and L1) would be set to logical 1.

If more than one of the loop impedances lie within the under-impedance startingcharacteristic, the signals L1 and L2 and L3 are set to logical 1.

The kind of fault is thus determined, information which is needed for.

• phase selection (determination of the loop to be measured)• signaling the kind of fault (signaling relays, LEDs etc.)• enabling signals for tripping• starting the timers

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

56 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 63: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Phase selectionGUID-F5513F63-3A6F-4981-AF34-6B92F2828581 v1

The phase selection logic determines the loop:

• for the underimpedance starting measurement when an ground fault has been detected• to be measured in the first period (max. 20 ms) after starting• to be measured during the time the function is in the picked-up state when a ground fault

has been detected on an ungrounded system or system with Petersen coils (phaseselection ≠ solidly grounded)

In a solidly grounded system (parameter PhaseSelMode set to solid gr.), the loop to bemeasured is determined according to the following table:

Table 48: Solidly grounded system- loop to be measured

Type of fault Starters Loop measured

Phase-to-ground fault L1, E L1E

Phase-to-ground fault L2, E L2E

Phase-to-ground fault L3, E L3E

Phase-to-phase fault L1, L2 L1L2

Phase-to-phase fault L2, L3 L2L3

Phase-to-phase fault L3, L1 L3R

Phase-to-phase-to-ground fault L1, L2, E L1L2

Phase-to-phase-to-ground fault L2, L3, E L2L3

Phase-to-phase-to-ground fault L3, L1, E L3L1

Three-phase fault L1, L2, L3 L3L1 (L1L2) (L2L3)

In a solidly grounded system, both phases involved in a phase-to-phase-to-ground fault haveto trip, which is not the case in ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils. Thephase-to-phase loops are measured.

In ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils (parameter PhaseSelMode set to cyclic/acyclic phase selection), the loop to be measured is determined according to the followingtable:

Table 49: Ungrounded system or Peterson coil - loop to be measured

Type of fault Starters Loop measured

Phase-to-phase fault L1, L2 L1L2

Phase-to-phase fault L2, L3 L2L3

Phase-to-phase fault L3, L1 L3L1

Three-phase fault L1, L2, L3 L3L1 (L1L2) (L2L3)

Cross-country fault *) L1, L2, E according to phaseselection logic

Cross-country fault *) L2, L3, E

Cross-country fault *) L3, L1, E

*) two ground faults at different locations

In ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils, it is usual for just one of the twoground faults of a cross-country fault to be tripped, so that as much of the system remains inoperation as possible.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 57Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 64: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

This is achieved by arranging for all the distance relays on the system to measure the sameground fault loop and this is the purpose of the phase selection function.

The logic of the phase selection function provides a choice of the following sequences:

Table 50: Phase selection function

Starters Fault loop measure in relation to “PhaseSelMode”L1L3L2L1 L3L1L2L3 L1L3L2 L1L2L3 L3L2L1 L3L1L2 L2L1L3 L2L3L1cycl. cycl. acycl. acycl. acycl. acycl. acycl. acycl.

L1, L2, E L2E L1E L1E L1E L2E L1E L2E L2E

L2, L3, E L3E L2E L3E L2E L3E L3E L2E L2E

L3, L1, E L1E L3E L1E L1E L3E L3E L1E L3E

L1L3L2L1 cyclic (L1 before L3, L3 before L2, L2 before L1) means, for example, that for a cross-country fault L3-L1-E, L1 phase (the L1-E loop) is measured rather than L3 phase, for a cross-country fault L2-L3-E, L3 phase (the L3-E loop) rather than L2 phase and for a cross-countryfault L1-L2-E, L2 phase (the L2-E loop) rather than L1 phase.

L1L3L2 acyclic (L1 before L3 before L2) means, for example, that for a cross-country fault L3-L1-E, L1 phase (the L1-E loop) is measured rather than L3 phase, for a cross-country fault L2-L3-E,L3 phase (the L3-E loop) rather than L2 phase and for a cross-country fault L1-L2-E, L1 phase(the L1-E loop) rather than L2 phase.

5.1.7.2 Distance measurement

Measurement procedureGUID-4758E276-EF78-407E-A4FB-4DBDB27D8DF6 v1

The distance measurement of a fault is enabled after one of the two starting functions,overcurrent or underimpedance, has picked up twice.

Initially the fault loop determined by the phase selection function is measured. This is calledprocessing period I and lasts until a trip signal is generated in the first zone or a maximum ofone period of the power system frequency.

At the latest after one period of the power system frequency, all six impedance loops aremeasured. This is called processing period II, during which the three phase-to-ground loopsand the three phase-to-phase loops are measured alternately.

Comparison of the results of the six measurements eliminates those impedance loops, whichare not involved in the fault (selectivity conditions).

The timer started by the starting units controls the comparison of the measured impedanceswith the polygon characteristic.

Measurement during processing period IGUID-E268B4D1-355B-4054-93C6-A238ED29EDCA v1

Processing period I lasts from the instant a starter picks up until the first tripping signal isgenerated, but is restricted to a maximum of one period of the power system frequency. Theinput signals are the phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3, the residual current IE (3I0), the residual currentof any parallel circuit IEm (3I0m), the neutral current IEm of any parallel circuit of a double-circuitline (3I0m) and the three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 and UL3. All are sampled, analogueand digitally filtered and broken down into their component vectors.

If the overcurrent starters are in operation and have picked up, the phase selection function isperformed and the loop to be measured determined. Should this not be the case, the loopdetermined by the underimpedance starters is measured.

The impedance of a phase-to-ground loop, for example, L1-E is calculated using the equation:

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

58 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 65: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

1

1 0 0

LR

L E m Em

UZ

I k I k I

(compensated)

where,

• k0: zero-sequence compensation factor for Z0

0 1/ 3k Z

• k0m: zero-sequence compensation factor for the mutual impedance Z0m of double-circuitline

0 0 13m mk Z Z

The mutual zero-sequence impedance of a double-circuit line (k0m × IEm) is only compensatedfor the first, second and overreaching zones, and in the latter two cases, only if their directionof measurement is the same as that of the first zone. In this respect, a reverse measuring zoneis treated in the same manner as an overreaching zone.

The mutual zero-sequence impedance (k0m × IEm) is not compensated, should IEm exceed 1.25 ×IE or the direction of IEm not be the same as that of IE. This prevents a healthy parallel circuitfrom being adversely influenced by a fault relatively close to the relay location of the faultedcircuit.

Assuming a fault between L1 and L2, the impedance of the phase-to-phase loop is calculatedusing the equation:

1 21 2

1 2

L LL L

L L

U UZ

I I

It is determined almost simultaneously, whether the impedance measured lies within thecharacteristic and whether it is in the direction of the first zone and overreaching zone, or inthe direction of the reverse measuring zone. The corresponding tripping and other signals areprocessed by the system logic. Tripping of the circuit-breaker, however, only takes place aftera measuring unit has operated twice.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 59Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 66: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

I , I , I , IL1 L2 L3 E

U , U , U , UL1 L2 L3 E

START

NTrip

N

Y

Z calculation

(ph-0 compensated)

Overcurrent

Stoping

Y

END

Signalling,fault location,

Z(loop)

the timers

Nt > 1 periode

Loop =

phase selection

starter

Y

Change to

processing

periode II

Overcurrent

starter

Change to

processing

periode II

Z , Z , (Z ),Start 1-4 OR

Z , directionBack

18000014-IEC19000416-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000416 V1 EN-US

Figure 15: Processing period I

Measurement during processing period IIGUID-170FC07B-AEC8-4224-9871-EB915AC3D2FD v1

Processing period II commences after the first tripping signal or at the latest one period of thesystem frequency after a starter picks up. The variables measured are the same as thosealready processed during processing period I.

Only in the case of a cross-country fault in an ungrounded system or system with Petersencoils is measurement restricted during processing period II to just the impedance loopdetermined by the phase selection logic, otherwise all the phase-to-ground and phase-to-

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

60 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 67: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

phase impedance loops are continuously processed in sequence, providing the enabling andground fault criteria are fulfilled.

The equations used to calculate the loop impedances are the same as those used in Section .

It is then determined whether the impedance measured lies within the characteristic andwhether it is in the direction of the zone being measured. The overreaching zone and reversemeasuring zone are evaluated as part of the measurement of the first zone. The correspondingtripping and other signals are processed by the system logic. Tripping of the circuit-breaker,however, only takes place after a measuring unit has operated twice.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 61Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 68: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

UL1, UL2, UL3, UE

IL1, IL2, IL3, IE

START

N

N

Y

Y

END

Signals

Stop timers

N Trip

Reset signals

Selectivity conditions

Y

Solidly grounded system AND

(I > starting active)

Calculat six Z (Ph-0 compensated)

Reset conditions

Signals, Fault location,

Z(loop)

Istart, UZ starters

Select phases

Ph-E N

Y

Calculat three Z Ph-Ph

Calculate Z Ph-0

ZStart, Z1-4, (ZOR), ZBack, direction

18000015-IEC19000417-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000417 V1 EN-US

Figure 16: Processing period II

Directional decisionGUID-10744C55-5A70-473E-84CF-B1D445573981 v1

Before deciding the direction of a fault, the fault voltage (used as reference voltage) is checkedto determine whether it is higher than the setting of the parameter UKmin (minimum fault

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

62 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 69: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

voltage). Providing this is the case, the phase-angle of the impedance, that is, between faultcurrent and voltage, is determined:

arg argU

ZI

argZ = arg U - arg I

where,

• arg: argument of the complex number (angle)• U: fault voltage

U = UL1 (phase-to-ground loop L1-E)U = UL1 − UL2 (phase-to-phase loop L1-L2)

• I: fault currentI = IL1 (phase-to-ground loop L1-E)I = IL1 − IL2 (phase-to-phase loop L1-L2)

arg Z must lie within the following limits for the fault to be designated a forwards fault:

-27° < arg Z < +117°

Arg Z must lie within the following limits for the fault to be designated a reverse fault:

+153° < arg Z < -63°

Z is the impedance measured by the protection, which corresponds to the line impedance ZL.By using the fault voltage as reference voltage for determining direction, the measurement isindependent of source impedance.

If the fault voltage is less than the setting of the parameter

Umin(minimum fault voltage), the impedance is determined from the fault current and aseparate reference voltage:

arg arg arg argrefref ref

UZ U I

I

where,

• arg: angle (argument) of the complex number• Uref: reference voltage

Uref = (UL2 – UL3) ⋅ ∠27° (phase-to-ground loop L1-E)Uref = (UL1 - UL3) + 1/8 ⋅ (UL1mem – UL3mem) (phase-to-phase loop L1-L2)

• I: fault currentI = IL1 (phase-to-ground loop, for example, L1-E)I = IL1 - IL2 (phase-to-phase loop, for example, L1-L2)

The reference voltage Uref is derived from the phase voltages not involved in the fault. In thecase of a phase-to-phase loop, the reference voltage also includes a proportion of the memoryvoltage Umem. The duration of the memory voltage is limited to between 5 and 15 periods ofthe power system frequency, depending on the discrepancy between the measured frequency

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 63Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 70: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

and the rated power system frequency, that is, the memory voltage is used for 15 periods atrated system frequency and for a proportionally reduced number of periods as the frequencydeviates from rated power system frequency.

As long as the reference voltage Uref is greater than 0.5% of the rated voltage, it is used todetermine fault direction.

In this case, a forwards fault satisfies the condition:

-90° < arg Zref < +90°

A reverse fault satisfies the condition:

+90° < arg Zref < -90°

Zref is the impedance measured by the protection, which contains a component of the sourceimpedance ZS in addition to the line impedance ZL. The operating characteristic has to bemathematically transformed in order to make the influence of the source impedance visible. Ifthe reference voltage is less than 0.5% of the rated voltage, direction is not taken into accountfor the phase-to-ground loop and tripping is blocked. In the case of the phase-to-phase loops,tripping is either enabled or blocked, depending on the setting of the parameter MemDirMode.

5.1.7.3 VT supervisionGUID-66C20810-64C5-419C-9A32-29BBE2A3DA00 v1

The purpose of the VT supervision function is to monitor the VT leads with respect toasymmetrical short-circuits and open-circuits. An MCB can be included for three-phase VTshort-circuits and arranged to block the protection via a separate optocoupler input.

The input variables monitored by the VT supervision function are the three voltages UL1, UL2,and UL3 and the three currents IL1, IL2, IL3. The zero-sequence (U0, I0) and negative-sequence(U2, I2) components are calculated for both the three-phase voltage and three-phase currentsystems:

3U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3

3U2 = UL1 + UL2 × a2 + UL3 × a3

0.5 1/1202

a j

3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

3I2 = IL1 + IL2 × a2 + IL3 × a

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

64 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 71: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000016-IEC19000418-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000418 V1 EN-US

Figure 17: VT supervision

The measurement has to be performed using the negative-sequence component, wheneverthere is no source of residual current behind the relay, that is, no grounded transformerneutrals. The parameter VTSupMode (operating mode) must be set accordingly.

The zero and/or negative-sequence components of currents and voltages are compared withthe settings of the parameters:

• U0min VTSup [U0_VTSUP]• I0min VTSup [I0_VTSUP]• U2min VTSup [U2_VTSUP]• I2min VTSup [I2_VTSUP]• the associated binary signals U0, U2, I0 and I2 are then set to logical 1 or left at logical 0.

The signals U0 and U2 are delayed by 5 ms as a precaution against incorrect blocking as aresult of discrepancies between the operating times of the three circuit-breaker poles.

Depending on the operating mode selected, one of the following four conditions is monitored:

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 65Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 72: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

• U0 not I0 residual voltage, but no residual current• U2 not I2 negative seq. voltage, but no neg. seq. current• (U0 not I0) + (U2 not I2) condition 1 or 2• U2 . not (I0 + I2) negative sequence voltage, but neither residual current nor negative

sequence current.

Blocking by the VT supervision function is delayed for 12 s following manual closing of thecircuit-breaker, an external blocking signal (MCB via an optocoupler input), a transfer trippingsignal from the opposite station or the generation of a local tripping signal.

Should U0 (or U2) and I0 (or I2) pick-up during this delay, operation of the VT supervisionfunction remains blocked until U0 (or U2) resets. This measure prevents unwanted blockingduring single-phase autoreclosure.

The signal generated by the VT supervision function VTSupMode instantly blocks the distanceprotection function. Resetting the parameter VTSupMode [VTSUP_BLKDEL] enables thedistance function to be blocked after delay of 12 s.

From 12 s after the VT supervision circuit has picked up, resetting of blocking is delayed by 1 s.Standard MCB’s can therefore be used, providing their main contacts do not close before theirauxiliary contacts.

Blocking by the VT supervision circuit resets the instant a fault with zero and negativesequence components occurs.

The parameter VTSupDebDel [VTSUP_DEBDEL] (deblocking) provides facility for setting the 1 sreset delay permanently regardless of current.

The blocking signal issued by the VT supervision function does not influence the backupovercurrent function.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

66 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 73: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5 145 14

5 145 14

OROR

OROR

1200012000

1200012000

U2_VTSUP

U0_VTSUP

D_RST

MANCL_DIST

HFREC

EXTBLK_DIST

I2_VTSUP

I0_VTSUP

OROROROR

ANDANDAND

ANDANDANDOROR

ANDANDAND

ANDANDAND

OROR

ANDANDAND

OROROROR

ANDANDANDOROR

VTSUP_BLKDEL

VTSUP DEBDEL

12000 100012000 1000

VTFAIL

VTFAIL_DLY

VTFAIL_IU0

VTFAIL_IU2

18000017-IEC19000419-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000419 V1 EN-US

Figure 18: VTSUP

Table 51: Signals VT supervision (see above diagram)

Signal In Out Source Drain

U2_VTSUP X U2 > U2 VT Sup

U0_VTSUP X U0 > U0 VT Sup

D_L1L2L3 X Binary output: Trip L1L2L3

MANCL_DIST X Binary input: Manual Close

HFREC X Binary input: Com Rec

EXTBLK_DIST X Binary input: Ext Blk Dist

I2_VTSUP X I2 > I2 VT Sup

I0_VTSUP X I0 > I0 VT Sup

VTSUP_BLKDEL X Input parameter: Sup Blk Del On = 1;Off = 0

VTSUP_DEBDEL X Input parameter: Sup Deb Del On =1; Off = 0

VTFAIL_IU2 X Internal logic signal

VTFAIL_IU0 X Internal logic signal

VTFAIL_DLY X Binary output: VT Sup

VTFAIL X Binary output: VT Sup Del

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 67Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 74: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.1.7.4 Backup overcurrent function (O/C Backup)GUID-4A4F2D83-D04E-4142-BC6C-D7B9D20D0FD0 v1

The distance protection function includes a definite time overcurrent unit as backupprotection. A starting signal Start O/C is set to logical 1, when one or more of the currents IL1,IL2, and IL3 exceed the setting of I O/C. After the time O/C Delay, the tripping signal Trip O/Cto the system logic is set to logical 1.

Blocking signals generated by the distance, underimpedance starting, power swing blockingor VT supervision functions do not influence the backup overcurrent function.

The overcurrent function is independent of the distance protection starters and, not having toperform phase selection, can have a more sensitive setting.

5.1.7.5 System logic

Structure of the system logicGUID-1AF2E4BA-F6B1-4611-A4DA-ED64F2D7C3A4 v1

The system logic processes the binary input signals from external plant (optocoupler inputs)and all the binary signals of the distance protection function.

18000018-IEC19000420-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000420 V1 EN-US

Figure 19: System logic in the distance protection function

The system logic outputs are binary signals for controlling a disturbance recorder, LED signalsand auxiliary tripping and signaling relays.

Enabling and disabling logic (SUPBL)GUID-8513CE77-ACA6-47B3-82D3-9AFE624C370B v1

The logic of the VT supervision function (VTSUP segment) has already been described in therelevant Section. The external blocking signals for distance protection [EXTBL_DIST] (opto-

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

68 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 75: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

coupler inputs), the power swing blocking [PS_BLOCK] and the VT supervision [VT_BLOCK]functions received by the SUPBL segment block all the distance protection functions [DISTBL]with the exception of the backup overcurrent function.

OR

EXTBLK_DIST100

PSBBLOCK

VTFAIL

DISTBL

18000019-IEC19000421-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000421 V1 EN-US

Figure 20: SUPBL segment

Table 52: Signals VT SUPBL

Signal In Out Source Drain

EXTBLK_DIST X Binary input: Ext Blk Dist

PSBBLOCK X Binary output: Ext Blk PSB

VTFAIL X Binary output: VT Sup Delay

DISTBL X Binary output: Dist Block

See Figure 18.

Switch-onto-fault logic (SOTF)GUID-73975CBF-96D6-4264-A0C1-21ED47FF37DD v1

When a circuit-breaker is closed onto and existing three-phase fault anywhere in the powersystem, instantaneous three-phase tripping takes place.

The fault detectors in this case are the non-directional starters (overcurrent orunderimpedance units) or optionally the over-reaching zone, but this is only used in thefollowing special cases:

• Power transformer with high inrush currents at the remote end of the line. In such cases,fault detection involving the distance measuring units is safer.

• Close faults with complete voltage collapse may possibly not otherwise be detected, inwhich case the parameter MemDirMode has to be set to Trip.

The switch-onto-fault logic can be activated and the switch-onto-fault signal [SOTF] set tological 1 in one of three ways:

1. by an auxiliary contact on the CB control switch when closing the CB (optocoupler inputManual close [MANCL_DIST])

2. by an auxiliary contact on the CB when opening the CB (optocoupler input Dead line[DEADLINE])

3. by prolonged undervoltage (U weak) on all three phases and no current enable whichcorresponds to a dead line [UWEAK_L1, L2, L3]

Alternative 2) is used, if the VTs are connected to the busbars and alternative 1) is not possible.The criteria of alternatives 2) and 3) are only effective after either 200 ms or 10 s [SOTF_10S](setting), depending on whether the switch-onto-fault logic is required to operate after

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 69Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 76: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

autoreclosure (200 ms) or not (10 s). For dead times longer than 10 s (autoreclosure function)there is the possibility of using the blocking input Ext Blk SOTF. This is a binary input which isinterlocked by [P_SOTF_INIT] via an AND gate.

Combining undervoltage and a missing current enable signal [CREL_L1, L2, L3] as in alternative3) prevents mal-operation of the logic after 200 ms, respectively 10 s, in cases of system faultswith low fault current contribution detected in the higher distance zones.

Resetting of the signal SOTF [START_SOTF] is delayed by 1 s, that is, every distance protectionstart within a time of 1 s after one of the three switch-onto-fault criteria was fulfilled gives riseto three-phase tripping [SOTF] of the circuit-breaker.

Uweak_L1

Uweak_L2

Uweak_L3T

AND

CREL_L1

CREL_L2

OR DeadLine

AND SOTF_10S

AND

10000

200

OR

1000

AND

MANCL_DIST

SOTF_INI

START_SOTF

SOTF

CREL_L3

18000020-IEC19000422-1-en.vsdx

18000020-IEC19000425-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000422 V1 EN-US

Figure 21: SOFT segment

Table 53: Signals SOFT (see above diagram)

Signal In Out Source Drain

Uweak_L1 X Starter: UL1 < Umin

Uweak_L2 X Starter: UL2 < Umin

Uweak_L3 X Starter: UL3 < Umin

CREL_L1 X Starter: IL1 > Imin (current release)

CREL_L2 X Starter: IL2 > Imin (current release)

CREL_L3 X Starter: IL3 > Imin (current release)

DeadLine X Binary input: DeadLine

SOTF_10S X Setting: SOFT 10sec(On=1 / Off=0)

MANCL_DIST X Binary input: Manual Close

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

70 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 77: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal In Out Source Drain

SOTF_INI X Always = 0,when SOFT = Offwhen SOFT = Non-directionalSOTF_INI = (Starter! = 0)when SOFT = Forwards ORSOTF_INI = (Starter! = 0) &(fault in overreach zone)

START_SOTF X Binary signal: SOFTpicked up

SOTF X Binary signal: SOFTstarting signal

Short-zone logic (STUB)GUID-9988E657-D310-4C53-B57B-4707C9A89623 v1

In 1½ breaker schemes, the short zone between the two circuit-breakers and the line isolatorcan be protected by the backup overcurrent function by permitting its instantaneous pick-upsignal [TRIP_OC_L1L2L3] to trip the circuit-breakers [TRIP_STUB] after 25 ms whenever the lineisolator is open (signal applied to the optocoupler input Isolator open).

This arrangement is only necessary, if the VTs are installed on the line side of the isolator andthe CTs are in the bars between the circuit-breakers.

AND

25

ISOL_OPEN

TRIP_OC_L1L2L3 TRIP_STUB

18000021-IEC19000423-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000423 V1 EN-US

Figure 22: STUB segment

Table 54: Signals VT STUB (see above diagram)

Signal In Out Source Drain

ISOL_OPEN X Binary input: Isolator open

TRIP_OC_L1L2L3 X Binary signal: Trip O/C

TRIP_STUB X Binary signal: Trip Stub

Zone extension logic (ZE)GUID-732C90E0-C051-498E-8E01-B8BAEF2D48A1 v1

This logic enables a signal from another function or an external signal to switch the reach ofthe first distance zone from the underreaching to overreaching [BIT_TRIP_ZE].

Such a signal can originate, for example, from the internal auto-reclosure function (binaryinput ZExtensionAR [AR_ZE]) or from an optocoupler input (binary input ZExtension [ZE_FOR_DIST]).

The internal autoreclosure function issues an overreach signal [AR_ZE] when all theautoreclosure conditions are fulfilled.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 71Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 78: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

OR

AND RSFF

S

R Q

AR_ZE

START_ L1L2L3 BIT_TRIP_ZE

ZE_FOR_DIST

18000022-IEC19000424-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000424 V1 EN-US

Figure 23: ZE segment

Table 55: Signals ZE (see above diagram)

Signal In Out Source Drain

ZE_FR_DIST X Binary input: ZExtension

AR_ZE X Binary input: ZExtensionAR

START_L1L2L3 X Binary signal: Start L1+L2+L3

BIT_TRIP_ZE X Internal signal to trip logic(TRIP3)

Communication channel failure (UNBLOCK)GUID-EB4943D5-5BA6-473A-BCB0-FB8B294A3B96 v1

This logic is only used in conjunction with a permissive underreaching transfer trippingscheme (PUTT OR2) or a permissive overreaching transfer tripping scheme (POTT).

The logic causes the communication channel failure signal from the communicationequipment (optocoupler input Com Fail) to be interpreted as a receive signal for 100 ms. Thisenables tripping [BIT_UNBL] to take place in PUTT OR2 or POTT schemes in cases where thePLC receive signal is attenuated by the primary system fault on the line.

AND 20

20AND

P UNBLOCK

HFREC

HFFAIL

BIT_UNBL

180000023-IEC19000425-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000425 V1 EN-US

Figure 24: UNBLOCK segment

Table 56: Signals UNBLOCK (see above diagram)

Signal In Out Source Drain

P_UNBLOCK X Setting: UnblockOn = 1; Off = 0

HFREC X Binary input: Com Rec

HFFAIL X Binary signal: Com Fail

BIT_UNBL X Internal signal to the POTTor PUTT logic.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

72 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 79: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT)GUID-666A852F-90EE-4C7D-BF10-B16BFE5DDD69 v1

The criteria for tripping and transmission of a transfer trip signal by the distance protectionfunction in a PUTT scheme are given in the tabular overview below.

t = Delay (1) Trip Send Trip (PUTT NONDIR) Trip (PUTT FWD) Trip (PUTT OR2) Send Trip Send Trip Send Trip Send

t = Com Rec :

t = Delay (Def) :

t = Delay (3) :

t = Delay (2) :

= 0 sec : = Meas Main = Meas Main = Com Rec * (Start L1+L2+L3 + Weak) = Com Rec * Meas Fward = (Com Rec + Unblock) * Meas Oreach = Meas Main = Meas Main = Meas Main = Meas Main = "0" = Start L1+L2+L3 (dir/nondir) = "0"

IEC19000426 V1 EN-US

PUTT transmit logic (PUTT_SEND)GUID-DBE31BF6-F8DB-4CE9-90F5-A256D838FC8D v1

The logic (PUTT_SEND) transfers its output signals to a common transmit logic for PUTT,POTT and BLOCK OR schemes.

AND

PUTT ON

PUTTSEND

PUTT NONDIR

PUTT FWD

PUTT OROR

DELAY3

MEAS MAIN

START LIL2L3

18000024-IEC19000427-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000427 V1 EN-US

Figure 25: PUTT_SEND segment

Table 57: Signals PUTT_SEND (see above diagram)

Signal In Out Source Drain

PUTT_NONDIRPUTT_FWDPUTT_OR

X Setting: Com ModePUTT non-directional:PUTT_NONDIR = 1PUTT Forwards: PUTT_FWD = 1PUTT OR2: PUTT_BWD = 1

DELAY3 X Binary output: Delay 3

MEAS_MAIN X Binary output: Meas Main

START_L1L2L3 X Binary output: Start L1+L2+L3

PUTT_ON X Internal signal to thedistance functiontransmit logic(SENDLOGIC)

PUTT_SEND X Internal signal to thedistance functiontransmit logic

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 73Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 80: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

The transmission criteria are fulfilled when the local measuring unit trips, thestarters have picked up and the third time step has not started.

PUTT receive logic (PUTT_REC)GUID-DF78E9B4-5AED-4F54-BDB4-282C1DCFC704 v1

The receive logic (PUTT_REC) transfers its output signals to the tripping logic. Account istaken of a weak infeed (Weak) [UWEAK_L1, L2, L3] or a short enable signal in the event offailure of the communication channel (Unblock) [BIT_UNBL].

Provision is made for applying the tripping criterion to the entire underimpedance startingcharacteristic (PUTT non-directional) [PUTT_NONDIR], starting in forwards direction (PUTTForwards) [PUTT_FWD] or the overreaching of 2nd zone (PUTT OR2) [PUTT_OR2].

AND

AND

OR

AND

OR

OR

AND

AND AND

OR

OR

OR

PUTT_NONDIR

START_L1L2L3

PUTT_OR

MEAS_OR2

PUTT_FWD

UZ_FWD

DELAY2

M_OWN

BIT_UNBL

HFREC

P_WEAK

100

100

AND

AND

TRIP_PUTT

UWEAK_PUTT

UWEAK_L1_PUTT

UWEAK_L2_PUTT

UWEAK_L3_PUTT

UWEAK_L1

UWEAK_L2

UWEAK_L3

5000

18000025-IEC19000428-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000428 V1 EN-US

Figure 26: PUTT_REC segment

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

74 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 81: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Table 58: Signals PUTT_REC (see above diagram)

Signal In Out Source Drain

PUTT_NONDIRPUTT_FWDPUTT_OR

X Setting: Com ModePUTT non-directional:PUTT_NONDIR = 1PUTT Forwards:PUTT_FWD = 1PUTT OR2:PUTT_BWD = 1

DELAY2 X Binary output: Delay 2

M_OWN X Internal logic signal (TRIP2)

START_L1L2L3 X Binary output: Start L1+L2+L3

UZ_FWD X Binary output: Meas Fward

MEAS OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach

BIT_UNBL X Internal logic signal (UNBLOCK)

HFREC X Binary input: Com Rec

P_WEAK X Setting: WeakOn = 1; Off = 0

UWEAK_L1 X UL1 < Umin

UWEAK_L2 X UL2 < Umin

UWEAK_L3 X UL3 < Umin

TRIP_PUTT X Internal signal totripping logic (TRIP2),where it is comparedwith all the trippingconditions to generatethe binary signals TripL1, Trip L2 etc.

UWEAK_PUTT X Internal signal totripping logic (TRIP1)

UWEAK_L1_PUTT X Internal signal totripping logic (TRIP1)

UWEAK_L2_PUTT X Internal signal totripping logic (TRIP1)

UWEAK_L3_PUTT X Internal signal totripping logic (TRIP1)

Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (POTT)GUID-0BCB973B-50BB-4274-B7A5-6E26D6CDC88D v1

The POTT logic is divided into a receive logic (POTT_REC) and a transmit logic (POTT_SEND).

The receive logic (POTT_REC) transfers its output signals to the tripping logic. Account istaken of any weak infeed (Weak) [UWEAK_L1, L2, L3], a short enable signal in the event offailure of the communication channel (Unblock) [BIT_UNBL] or transient blocking (Transbl)[BIT_TBE] signal.

The logic (POTT_SEND) transfers its output signals to a com-mon transmit logic for PUTT,POTT and BLOCK OR schemes, while taking account of any echo signal received in the event ofa weak infeed. The criteria for tripping [TRIP_POTT] and transmission [SEND_POTT] of atransfer trip signal by the distance protection function in a POTT scheme are given in thetabular overview below:

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 75Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 82: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

t = Delay (1) Trip

Send Trip Trip Weak Send Send Echo Trip Send Trip Send Trip Send

t = Com Rec :

t = Delay (Def) :

t = Delay (3) :

t = Delay (2) :

= 0 sec : = Meas Main = Meas Oreach * notTransbl = (Com Rec + Unblock) * Meas Oreach * notTransbl = Com Rec * Weak * notMeas Bward * notMeas Oreach = Meas Oreach * notTransbl = Com Rec * notMeas Bward = Meas Main = "0" = Meas Main = "0" = Start L1+L2+L3 (dir/nondir) = "0"

IEC19000429 V1 EN-US

POTT transmit logic (POTT_SEND)GUID-994B7BE2-D432-4EA1-9F19-9D37D6B8F750 v1

AND

AND

AND

OR

AND

AND

AND

OR

P_POTTPOTT_ON

MEAS_OR2

BIT_TBE

DELAY2

P_ECHO

100

EXTBLK_HF

HFREC

150

POTT_SEND

MEAS_BWD

M_OWN

18000026-IEC19000430-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000430 V1 EN-US

Figure 27: POTT_SEND segment

Table 59: Signals POTT_SEND

Signal In Out Source Drain

P_POTT X Setting: Com ModePOTTP_POTT= 1

MEAS_OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach

BIT_TBE X Internal logic signal TRANSBL

DELAY2 X Binary output: Delay 2

P_ECHO X Setting: EchoOn = 1; Off = 0

MEAS_BWD X Binary output: Meas Bward

M_OWN X Internal logic signal (TRIP2)

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

76 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 83: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal In Out Source Drain

EXTBLK_HF X Binary input: Com Rec

HFREC X Binary input: Ext Block HF

POTT_ON X Internal signal to thedistance functiontransmit logic

POTT_SEND X Internal signal to thedistance functiontransmit logic

POTT receive logic (POTT_REC)GUID-3FD38395-336F-41AD-B91E-B5B03E15C4C6 v1

OR

AND

OR

AND

OR

AND

OR

OR

200

20

200

5000

AND

AND

MEAS_OR2

BIT_UNBL

HFREC

BIT_TBE

DELAY2

M_OWN

EXTBLK_HF

MEAS_BWD

UWEAK_L1

UWEAK_L2

UWEAK_L3

P_WEAK

TBA_POTT

TRIP_POTT

UWEAK_POTT

UWEAK_L2_POTT

UWEAK_L3_POTT

18000027-IEC19000431-1-en.vsdx

UWEAK_L1_POTT

IEC19000431 V1 EN-US

Figure 28: POTT_REC segment

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 77Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 84: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Table 60: Signals POTT_REC

Signal In Out Source Drain

MEAS OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach

BIT_UNBL X Internal logic signal (UNBLOCK)

HFREC X Binary input: Com Rec

BIT_TBE X Internal logic signal TRANSBL

DELAY2 X Binary output: Delay 2

M_OWN X Internal logic signal (TRIP2)

EXTBLK_HF X Binary input: Com Rec

MEAS_BWD X Binary output: Meas Bward

UWEAK_L1 X UL1 < Umin

UWEAK_L2 X UL2 < Umin

UWEAK_L3 X UL3 < Umin

P_WEAK X Setting: WeakOn = 1; Off = 0

TBA_POTT X Internal logic signalTRANSBL

TRIP_POTT X Internal signal to trippinglogic (TRIP2), where it iscompared with all thetripping conditions togenerate the binarysignals Trip L1, Trip L2etc.

UWEAK_POTT X Internal signal to trippinglogic (TRIP1)

UWEAK_L1_POTT X Internal signal to trippinglogic (TRIP1)

UWEAK_L2_POTT X Internal signal to trippinglogic (TRIP1)

UWEAK_L3_POTT X Internal signal to trippinglogic (TRIP1)

Overreaching blocking scheme (BLOCK OR)GUID-26BC59BE-2C94-4675-A3EA-E6724D37FEAC v1

The BLOCK OR logic is divided into a receive logic (BLOC_REC) and a transmit logic(BLOC_SEND).

The output signals from the receive logic (BLOC_REC) are transferred to the tripping logic,while taking account of any transient blocking due to reversal of energy direction (TRANSBL).The output signals from the transmit logic are transferred to the common transmit logic forPUTT, POTT and BLOCK OR schemes. The tripping and transmit criteria can be seen from thetabular overview below.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

78 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 85: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

t = Delay (1) Trip Send Trip Send

Trip Send Trip Send

Trip Send

t = t1Block :

t = Delay (Def) :

t = Delay (3) :

t = Delay (2)

:

= 0 sec :

= Meas Main = Meas Bward = Meas Oreach * notComRec * notTransbl = Meas Bward + Transbl

= Meas Main = "0" = Meas Main = "0"

= Start L1+L2+L3 (dir/nondir) = "0"

IEC19000432 V1 EN-US

Block transmit logic BLOC_SENDGUID-44E3AA1C-BB3C-45A5-B3BD-7B7F6043E14B v1

AND

AND

AND

100

BLOCK ON

BLOCK

P BLOCK

SEND

HFFAIL

DELAY2

MEAS OR2

MEAS BWD

BIT TBE

18000028-IEC19000433-1-en.vsdx

OR

IEC19000433 V1 EN-US

Figure 29: BLOC_SEND segment

Table 61: Signals BLOC_SEND

Signal In Out Source Drain

P_BLOCK X Setting: Com ModeBLOCK OR P_BLOCK= 1

HFFAIL X Binary input Com Fail

BIT_TBE X Internal logic signalTRANSBL

MEAS OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach

DELAY2 X Binary output: Delay 2

MEAS_BWD X Binary output: Meas Bward

EXTBLK_HF X Binary input: Com Rec

BLOCK_ON X Internal signal to thedistance function transmitlogic

BLOCK_SEND X Internal signal to thedistance function transmitlogic

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 79Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 86: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

BLOCK receive logic (BLOC_REC)GUID-FF5B11F4-7F28-49B4-BBC1-C4C142D6D30F v1

AND

OR

AND

AND

T1 TRIP_BLOCK

TBA_BLOCK

P_BLOCK

HFFAIL

MEAS_OR2

P_T1_BLOCK

HFREC

DELAY2

M_OWN

BIT_TBE

18000029-IEC19000434-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000434 V1 EN-US

Figure 30: BLOC_REC segment

Table 62: Signals BLOC_REC

Signal In Out Source Drain

P_BLOCK X Setting: Com ModeBLOCK OR. P_BLOCK= 1

HFFAIL X Binary input Com Fail

BIT_TBE X Internal logic signal TRANSBL

MEAS OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach

DELAY2 X Binary output: Delay 2

MEAS_BWD X Binary output: Meas Bward

EXTBLK_HF X Binary input: Com Rec

P_T1_BLOCK Setting: t1Block

M_OWN X Internal logic signal (TRIP2)

HFREC X Binary input: Com Rec

TRIP_BLOCK X Internal signal to trippinglogic (TRIP2), where it iscompared with all thetripping conditions togenerate the binarysignals Trip L1, Trip L2 etc.

TBA_BLOCK X Internal logic signalTRANSBL

Reversal of power direction (TRANSBL)GUID-967B11E2-07FE-4A97-BAE5-7A1B47E5868E v1

This logic is only used in conjunction with a permissive over-reaching transfer tripping scheme(POTT) or an overreaching blocking scheme (BLOCK OR) on double-circuit lines with in-feedsfrom both ends and a high mutual zero-sequence impedance (both circuits on the samepylons). A blocking scheme does not require this logic, providing the waiting time is setsufficiently long.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

80 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 87: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

The logic solves the following problem (see Figure 31)

t = 0 s :

t = sign.rec.:

t = CB open :

Relays A1, B1 and B2 detect the fault in the OR zone and send a signal to the Remote end. Relay A2 detects a backward fault.

A1

A2 B2

B1

A1

A2 B2

B1

Relays A1, B1 and A2 receive a signal from the Remote end.

A1

A2 B2

B1 CB A1 opens before CB B1 opens. Relay A2 detects the fault in the OR zone, but still receives a signal from the remote end, for example, it trips and opens the “Healthy” line.

18000030-IEC19000435-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000435 V1 EN-US

Figure 31: Reversal of power direction

The operation of the logic is as follows (POTT solution):

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 81Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 88: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

OROR

OROR ANDANDAND

T

1

T

1

TBA_BLOCK

TBA_POTT

MEAS_BWDBIT_TBE

100T2 100T2

OROR

OROR ANDANDAND

T

1

T

1

TBA_BLOCK

TBA_POTT

MEAS_BWDBIT_TBE

100T2 100T2

OROR

OROR ANDANDAND

T

1

T

1

TBA_BLOCK

TBA_POTT

MEAS_BWDBIT_TBE

100T2 100T2

>= 1

>= 1

&

>= 1

>= 1

&

>= 1

>= 1

&

t = 0 s:

t = signal received

t = CB open:

~ ~

A1

A2

B1

B2

TBA_BLOCK

TBA_POTT T1

MEAS_BWD

T2 100

BIT_TBE

TBA_BLOCK

TBA_POTT T1

MEAS_BWD

T2 100

BIT_TBE

~ ~

A1

A2

B1

B2

~ ~

A1

A2

B1

B2

TBA_BLOCK

TBA_POTT T1

MEAS_BWD

T2 100

BIT_TBE

18000031-IEC19000436-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000436 V1 EN-US

Figure 32: Solutions to combat reversal of power direction

BIT_TBA = (ComRec + Unblock) × MeasOreach

BIT_TBE blocks TRIP_POTT (see POTT receive logic)

The critical relay A2 cannot trip, because the reverse measurement signal [MEAS_BWD] ismaintained for at least T1 (setting t1TransBl) and resets at the latest after T2 (settingt2TransBl). The purpose of T2 is to ensure that blocking is maintained should there beautoreclosure of the faulted circuit.

T1 allows time for the incorrect Com Rec signal to reset. Its setting is thus given by the resettime of relay B2 and the reset time of the communication channel. The receiver signal must notbe prolonged.

Tripping takes place instantaneously, if the tripping condition TBA is still fulfilled after thetime T1.

Tripping always causes the logic to reset, after which it remains inactive for 100 ms. Thefaulted circuit will therefore be immediately tripped, for example, in the case of anunsuccessful autoreclosure attempt.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

82 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 89: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Transmit logicGUID-0CFA8B44-2841-4ADF-AB6D-891A6E04C55B v1

The task of the transmit logic is to boost (Com Boost) the PLC transmitter and transmit asignal (signaling relay output Com Send) [HFSEND] to the opposite end of the line (signalingrelay output Com Boost) [HFBOOST].

General rules are:

• The underreaching zone transmits the signal in a permissive underreaching transfertripping scheme (PUTT).

• The overreaching zone transmits the signal in a permissive overreaching transfer trippingscheme (POTT).

• The reverse measuring zone transmits the blocking signal in an overreaching blockingscheme (BLOCK OR).

OR

OR

OR

AND

OR

AND

AND

PUTT_ON

POTT_ON

BLOCK_ON

PUTT_SEND

POTT_SEND

BLOCK_SEND

UWEAK_L1

UWEAK_L2

UWEAK_L3

2000

START_L1L2L3

DISTBL

BIT_HF_ON

HF_SEND

HF_BOOST

18000032-IEC19000437-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000437 V1 EN-US

Figure 33: TRANSBL segment

Table 63: Signals TRANSBL

Signal In Out Source Drain

PUTT_ON X PUTT logic

POTT_ON X POTT logic

BLOCK_ON X BLOCK logic

PUTT_SEND X PUTT logic

POTT_SEND X POTT logic

BLOCK_SEND X BLOCK logic

DISTBL X Enabling logic SUPBL

UWEAK_L1 X UL1 < Umin

UWEAK_L2 X UL2 < Umin

UWEAK_L3 X UL3 < Umin

START_L1L2T X Binary output: Start L1+L2+L3

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 83Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 90: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal In Out Source Drain

BIT_HF_ON X

HF_SEND X Binary output: Com Send

HF_BOOST X Binary output: Com Boost

Tripping logicGUID-1DAAFAD3-A23B-49F2-A598-D5C947EE2083 v1

The main purpose of the tripping logic is coordination of single and three-phase tripping ofthe circuit-breaker (heavy-duty tripping relay outputs). It also provides additional starting andtripping signals.

Single or three-phase tripping is initiated when the following conditions are simultaneouslyfulfilled:

• Starter picked up, that is, underimpedance start or overcurrent start or undervoltage start(Weak) [UWEAK_L1, L2, L3] from the POTT or PUTT receive logic.

• Trip by the relays own measuring unit, the back-up overcurrent unit, the short-zone (STUB)logic, the switch-onto-fault (SOFT) logic, the zone extension logic or by the PUTT, POTT orBLOCK OR receive logic.

• No blocking signal is being generated by the enable and blocking logic. (this signal cannotblock tripping by the back-up overcurrent unit or short-zone logic).

Only single-phase tripping will take place when:

• Trip Mode is set to 1 Ph Trip• The starter of just one phase has picked up• None of the conditions for three-phase tripping is fulfilled

Any of the following conditions results in three-phase tripping:

• Trip Mode set to 3 Ph Trip.• The starters of more than one phase have picked up.• The autoreclosure function commands the distance function to trip all three-phases.• Either the back-up overcurrent function or the short-zone logic has tripped.• Operation of the switch-onto-fault logic• A second trip occurs (for example, evolving fault), for example, during the autoreclosure

dead time.• The parameter Trip Mode is set to 3 Ph Trip Del 3 and the zone 3 time has expired

(autoreclosure in the 2nd zone as well).

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

84 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 91: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

TRIP 1GUID-92B6141A-DAD1-4FEC-9D8A-B37CF30ECAB3 v1

OROR

OROR

OROR

OROR

OROR

OROR

OROR

PHSEL_L1

UWEAK_L1_PUTT

UWEAK_L1_POTT

START_L1

PHSEL_L2

UWEAK_L2_PUTT

UWEAK_L2_POTT

START_L2

PHSEL_L3

UWEAK_L3_PUTT

UWEAK_L3_POTT

START_L3

OC_L1L2L3

P_L1L2L3

SIG_L3

BIT_L3

SIG_L2

BIT_L2

SIG_L1

BIT_L1

18000033-IEC19000438-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000438 V1 EN-US

Figure 34: TRIP 1 segment

Table 64: Signals TRIP 1

Signal In Out Source Drain

PHSEL_L1 X Phase sel L1

UWEAK_L1_PUTT X PUTT

UWEAK_L1_POTT X POTT

START_L1 X Start L1

PHSEL_L2 X Phase sel L2

UWEAK_L2_PUTT X PUTT

UWEAK_R_POTT X POTT

START_L2 X Start L2

PHSEL_L3 X Phase sel L3

UWEAK_L3_PUTT X PUTT

UWEAK_L3_POTT X POTT

START_L3 X Start L3

OC_L1SL3 X Start O/C Backup

BIT_L1 X TRIP3, TRIP2

SIG_L1 X Binary output Start L1

BIT_L2 X TRIP3, TRIP2

SIG_L2 X Binary output Start L2

BIT_L3 X TRIP3, TRIP2

SIG_L3 X Binary output Start L3

P_L1L2L3 X Binary output Start L1L2L3

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 85Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 92: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

TRIP 2GUID-DAA576EF-6B65-4556-825E-14548B9C00D0 v1

AND

BIT_L1

AND

AND

BIT_L2

BIT_L2

BIT_L3

BIT_L3

BIT_L1

AND

P_L1L2L3

DL1L2T

Tim

AND

4

AND

OR

AND

OR

P_T1_TRIP

OC_D

SOTF

TRIP_STUB

TRIP_3PH

AR_1POL_IN

BIT_3P

18000034-IEC19000439-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000439 V1 EN-US

Figure 35: TRIP 2 segment

Table 65: Signals TRIP 2

Signal In Out Source Drain

Signal In Out Source Drain

BIT_L1 X TRIP1

BIT_L2 X TRIP1

BIT_L3 X TRIP1

P_L1L2L3 X TRIP1

DL1L2L3 X Binary output: TRIP L1L2L3

P_T1_TRIP X Setting: t1 Evol Faults

OC_D X Binary output: Trip O/C

SOTF X Binary output: Trip CB

TRIP_STUB X STUB

TRIP_3PH X Setting: Trip Mode

AR_1POL_IN X Binary input: 1 pol AR

BIT_3P X TRIP3

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

86 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 93: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

TRIP 3GUID-DBF6475A-745D-4199-823D-7DE3465F44A9 v1

OR

AND

OR

OR

AND

OR

OR

OR

OR

AND

AND

AND

OR

AND

AND

AND

AND

RSFF

S

R Q

100

50ms

50ms

50ms

D

DL1

DL2

DL3

SOTF

ZE_FOR_DIST

MEAS_OR2

START_L1L2L3

AR_ZE

TRIP_STUB

OC_D

MEAS_MAIN

TRIP_PUTT

TRIP_POTT

TRIP_BLOCK

HF_OFF

BIT_3P

BIT_L1

BIT_L2

BIT_L3

DISTBL

M_OWN

REL_DH

18000035-IEC19000440-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000440 V1 EN-US

Figure 36: TRIP 3 segment

Table 66: Signals TRIP 3

Signal In Out Source Drain

SOTF X SOTF

ZE_FOR_DIST X Binary input: ZExtension

AR_ZE X Binary input: ZExtensionarAR

MEAS_OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach

START_L1L2L3 X Binary output: Start L1+L2+L3

TRIP_STUB X STUB

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 87Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 94: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal In Out Source Drain

OC_D X Binary output: Trip O/C

MEAS_MAIN X Binary output: Meas Main

TRIP_PUTT X PUTT

TRIP_POTT X POTT

TRIP_BLOCK X BLOCK

HF_OFF X Setting: Com ModeTrip → HF_OFF =1

BIT_3P X TRIP2

BIT_L1 X TRIP1

BIT_L2 X TRIP1

BIT_L3 X TRIP1

DISTBL X SUPBL

M_OWN X BLOCK, POTT, PUTT

D X Binary output: TRIP CB

DL1 X Binary output: TRIP CB L1

DL2 X Binary output: TRIP CB L2

DL3 X Binary output: TRIP CB L3

Trip 4GUID-B6D5C506-FA0F-441A-8B86-1A14A44CB930 v1

OR

AND

AND

AND

AND

OR

AND

8

REL_DH

DL1

DL2

DL3

DH

DL1L2L3

D3PH

D1PH

18000036-IEC19000441-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000441 V1 EN-US

Figure 37: TRIP 4 segment

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

88 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 95: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Table 67: Signals TRIP 4

Signal In Out Source Drain

DL1 X Binary output: TRIP CB L1

DL2 X Binary output: TRIP CB L2

DL3 X Binary output: TRIP CB L3

REL_DH X TRIP3

DH X Binary output: Trip Com Rec

DL1L2L3 X Binary output: TRIP L1L2L3

D3PH X Binary output: Trip CB 3PH

D1PH X Binary output: Trip CB 1PH

Power swing blockingGUID-E4D40E54-C506-4C96-B702-3FF8969E6661 v1

The purpose of the power swing blocking function is to prevent unwanted tripping of thedistance protection function in response to power system instability with oscillatoryfluctuations of power (power swings) or loss of synchronism (out-of-step). The power swingblocking function does not influence the operation of the back-up overcurrent function.

When power swings occur, the electrical parameters of the system vary at a slower or fasterrate in relation to the angle δ be-tween the voltage vectors of the energy sources in differentparts of the system. In the case of a fault on the other hand, step changes of these parameterstake place. The parameters, which regardless of location are subject to appreciable variation inthe general region around phase opposition (δ = 180°), are the resistance R and the voltagecomponent U × cosϕ. The value of ϕ corresponds to the angle between phase voltage andcurrent.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 89Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 96: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000037-IEC19000442-1-en.vsdx

E1 U E2

U

I

E1 E2

Independent of: - relay location

- relay characteristics

- relay settings

U cos

U cos

IEC19000442 V1 EN-US

Figure 38: Power swing blocking

The voltage and current input variables are passed on to the evaluation system. The criterionfor pick-up of the power swing blocking function is the continuous variation of (U × cosϕ),which corresponds to the variation of real power in relation to current amplitude (P = I × U ×cosϕ). The value of (U × cosϕ) is determined after every zero-crossing of the current. Ablocking signal is generated, as soon as a repetitive variation of the value of (U × cosϕ) isdetected, that is, a variation must be detected at least three times to count as a power swing.

Two periods are needed to detect the faster power swings up to a frequency of 8 Hz. Thepower swing blocking function does not pick up during a fault, because the variation of (U ×cosϕ) in relation to time only occurs once and at a much higher rate than the function’soperating range.

Slow swings are evaluated over five periods by a second system. At its lowest operating limit,this system detects a frequency of 0.2 Hz.

Together the two systems cover a range from 0.2 to 8 Hz and no setting is required duringcommissioning.

The blocking signal PSB is maintained for as long as the distance protection function is in thepicked-up state. The power swing blocking function is only effective for the symmetrical three-phase condition and cannot block the distance function for asymmetrical faults (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase faults).

A blocking signal is not issued, if the zero-crossings of the cur-rent signal occur at relativelyirregular intervals, because considerable differences between the zero-crossing intervals are aclear indication of a fault on the power system. Phase jumps in the current wave form occur at

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

90 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 97: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

the incidence of a fault, as a consequence of incorrect switching and when CT saturation takesplace. Since the currents during power swings are sinusoidal and do not contain a DCcomponent, it is permissible to assume that the problem of CT saturation does not arise.

Zero-crossings resulting from the slip are in any event excluded by the current enable settingof Imin.

5.2 Definite time over- and undercurrent protection 51(OCDT)

5.2.1 Mode of operationGUID-01B16DD6-3FA9-4079-9390-9204C842DAD9 v1

Over- and undercurrent function for:

• phase fault protection• backup protection• or for monitoring a current minimum

5.2.2 FeaturesGUID-0F07ECF4-7210-44FF-A17D-97F403D140FB v1

• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics• Single or three-phase measurement• Maximum respectively minimum value detection in the three-phase mode• Detection of inrush currents

5.2.3 Inputs and outputs

5.2.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-F644DFAA-0B84-4353-9F19-FE8FD67FE590 v1

• Current

5.2.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-AB3D1639-2EDC-4AE9-BE1B-DD3EA05AA4F9 v1

• Blocking

5.2.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-C0E2CC33-55E1-4C4F-84A0-CD307A90DA0A v1

• Pick-up• Tripping

5.2.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-AFB5BC3C-9DB7-450E-9C49-4CB7196297F7 v1

• Current amplitude

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 91Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 98: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.2.4 Function settingsGUID-C80D559E-594D-4F7B-B61E-4EA6723B603C v1

Table 68: Definite time current function - settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)

Delay s 01.00 0.02 60.00 0.01

I-Setting IN 02.00 0.02 20.00 0.01

MaxMin MAX (1ph) (Select)

NrOfPhases 001 1 3 2

CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr 0

BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off

Trip SignalAddr

Start SignalAddr

5.2.5 ParametersGUID-5E0B8E0E-A13D-4155-AF07-BF8DC0D4B0DF v1

Table 69: Definite time current function - parameters

Signal Description

ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive.

Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping.

I-Setting Pick-up current setting.Forbidden settings: >2.8 IN (when supplied from metering CT cores)

MaxMin Defines operation as overcurrent or undercurrent or with inrush blocking.Settings:

• MIN (3ph): Undercurrent. Three-phase functions detect the highest phasecurrent. Not permitted for single-phase functions.

• MIN (1ph): Undercurrent. Three-phase functions detect the lowest phasecurrent.

• MAX (3ph): Overcurrent. Three-phase functions detect the lowest phasecurrent. Not permitted for single-phase functions.

• MAX (1ph): Overcurrent. Three-phase functions detect the highest phasecurrent.

• MAX-Inrush: Blocks during inrush currents if one phase exceeds setting.

NrOfPhases Defines whether single or three-phase measurement.

CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel.All current I/P's may be selected.

BlockInp Input for blocking the function.

• F: not blocked• T: blocked• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Trip Tripping signal

Start Pick-up signal

5.2.6 ConfigurationGUID-AAEE593B-EAB3-4D4F-98C1-B0AE296307D5 v1

The following parameters have to be set:

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

92 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 99: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

I-Setting I-Setting

Delay Delay

Over orundercurrent

MaxMin

Number ofphases

NrOfPhases

Setting I-Setting

The current setting I-Setting must be sufficiently high to avoid any risk of false tripping orfalse signals under normal load conditions, but should be low enough to detect the lowestfault current that can occur. The margin which has to be allowed between the maximum short-time load current and the setting must allow for:

• the tolerance on the current setting• the reset ratio

The maximum short-time load current has to be determined according to the power systemconditions and must take switching operations and load surges into account.

18000038-IEC19000443-1-en.vsdx

I

0 t

I

N I

I - Setting

Delay

IEC19000443 V1 EN-US

Figure 39: Operating characteristic of the definite time over-current function

Compensating any difference between the rated currents of CT IN1 and protected unit IGN isrecommended. This is achieved with the aid of the reference value of the A/D channel or bycorrecting the overcurrent setting.

For example, for IGN = 800 A and IN1 = 1000 A, the setting for a pick-up current of 1.5 IGN = 1200A should be:

1

8001.5 1.5 1.2

1000

GN

N

I A

I A

CurrentInp

An interposing CT in the input is essential for current settings lower than 0.2 IN.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 93Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 100: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Delay

The delay is used to achieve discrimination of the overcurrent function. It is set according tothe grading table for all the over-current units on the power system. The zone of protection ofthe overcurrent function under consideration extends to the location of the next downstreamovercurrent relay.

Should the downstream relay fail to clear a fault, the overcurrent function trips slightly later ina backup role.

Setting MaxMin

This parameter enables the following operating modes to be selected:

• MIN (3ph): Pick-up when the highest phase current also falls below the setting. Thissetting is not permitted for single-phase meas.

• MIN (1ph): Pick-up when the lowest phase current falls be-low the setting.• MAX (3ph): Pick-up when the lowest phase current also exceeds the setting. This setting is

not permitted for single-phase measurement.• MAX (1ph): Pick-up when the highest phase current exceeds the setting.• MAX-Inrush: Blocking of inrush currents when a phase current exceeds the setting.

Operation of the inrush blocking feature (parameter MaxMin set to MAX-Inrush)

The inrush detector picks up and blocks operation of the function when the amplitude of thefundamental component of the current exceeds the current function setting.

The inrush detector is based on the evaluation of the second harmonic component of thecurrent I2h in relation to the fundamental frequency component I1h (evaluation of theamplitudes).

The output of the function is disabled when the ratio I2h/I1h exceeds 10% and enabled againwhen it falls below 8%.

There is no setting for the peak value of I2h/I1h.

The function can operate with inrush blocking in both the single and three-phase mode(parameter NrOfPhase).

In the three-phase mode, the phase used for evaluation is the one with the highest amplitudeat rated frequency (pick-up and inrush detection).

5.3 Inverse time overcurrent protection 51 (OC)

5.3.1 Mode of operationGUID-FF80694B-B995-460F-9783-D6B0A852D201 v1

Overcurrent function with time delay inversely proportional to the current and definiteminimum tripping time.

5.3.2 FeaturesGUID-4BAE5289-4B64-4659-94DF-02DEB395E65A v1

• Operating characteristics according to British Standard 142:

• c = 0.02: normal inverse• c = 1 : very inverse and long time earth fault• c = 2 : extremely inverse

• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

94 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 101: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

• Single or three-phase measurement• Detection of the highest phase value in the three-phase mode• Wider setting range than specified in BS 142

5.3.3 Inputs and outputs

5.3.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-BDDCFC86-141F-4BD9-B447-DED9D2056EBF v1

• Current

5.3.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-E49D975A-D235-4CD5-8D22-B2C3837A8E0C v1

• Blocking

5.3.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-EA349950-3CA6-4BAA-B95A-9C51B48004EE v1

• Pick-up• Tripping

5.3.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-C864F19B-CB26-4E35-81D0-736E8B679554 v1

• Current amplitude

5.3.4 Function settingsGUID-784F9416-151F-42BE-9371-39A4C1D7E75F v1

Table 70: Inverse time overcurrent function - settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet4..1 P1 (Select)

c-Setting 1.00 (Select)

k1-Setting s 013.5 0.01 200.0 0.01

IStart IB 1.10 1.00 4.00 0.01

t-min s 00.00 0.0 10.0 0.1

NrOfPhases 1 1 3 2

CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr 0

IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.04 2.50 0.01

BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off

Trip SignalAddr

Start SignalAddr

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 95Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 102: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.3.5 ParametersGUID-C69B399C-AE92-4B1F-A77C-5D8DAB1F4433 v1

Table 71: Inverse time overcurrent function - parameters

Signal Description

ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive.

c-Setting Setting for the exponential factor determining the operating characteristicaccording to BS 142 or for selecting the RXIDG characteristic.

k1-Setting Constant determining the parallel shift of the characteristic (time grading).

IStart Pick-up current at which the characteristic becomes effective.

t-min Definite minimum tripping time.

NrOfPhases Defines the number of phases measured.

CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel.All current I/P's may be selected.

IB-Setting Base current for taking account of differences of rated current IN.

BlockInp Defines the input for an external blocking signal.

• F: not used• T: function always blocked• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions).

Trip Tripping signal.

Start Pick-up signal.

5.3.6 ConfigurationGUID-0F3EB64C-C409-4C95-8E7F-CA8E1DE3A970 v1

The following parameters have to be set:

Base current IB-Setting

Characteristicenabling current

IStart

Type ofcharacteristic

c-Setting

Multiplier k1-Setting

The Inverse time overcurrent function is used to protect transformers, feeders and loads ofthe auxiliaries supply system against phase and earth faults. The function responds largelyonly to the fundamental component of the fault current.

Base current IB-Setting

The function does not have a fixed current setting above which it operates and below which itdoes not, as does a definite time-overcurrent relay. Instead, its operating characteristic isselected such that it is always above the load current. To this end, the relay has a referencecurrent IB that is set the same as the load current of the protected unit IB1. The referencecurrent IB determines the relative position of the relay characteristic which is enabled when thecurrent exceeds the reference current by a given amount (IStart). By setting the referencecurrent IB to equal the load current of the protected unit IB1 instead of its rated current, for

IB1 < IN of the protected unit: the protection is more sensitive

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

96 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 103: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

IB1 > IN of the protected unit: the protection permits maxi-mum utilization of the thermalcapability of the protected unit

For example,

• Load current of protected unit IB1 = 800 A• CT rated current IN1 = 1000 A

IN2 = 5 A• Relay rated current IN = 5 A

Relay reference current IB-Setting: Setting:

21

1

5800 4

1000

NB B

N

I AI I A A

I A

40.8

5

B

N

I A

I A

An alternative is to adjust the characteristic to match the rated load of the protected unit andset the reference current to its rated current instead of its load current.

Enabling the characteristic IStart

The characteristic is enabled when the current exceeds the setting IStart. A typical setting forIStart is 1.1 IB.

Choice of characteristic c-Setting

The constant c-Setting determines the shape of the characteristic. The settings for thestandard characteristics according to BS 142 are:

normal inverse: c = 0.02

very inverse and long time earthfault:

c = 1.00

extremely inverse: c = 2.00

t

I

IStart

IB

t =

k1

I

IB

c

1

tmin

18000039-IEC19000444-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000444 V1 EN-US

Figure 40: Operating characteristic of the inverse time overcurrent function

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 97Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 104: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

c-Setting can also be set to RXIDG, in which case the function’s inverse characteristiccorresponds to that of the relay type RXIDG.

t [s] = 5.8 - 1.35 LN (I / IB)

The parameter k1-Setting has no influence in this case.

Multiplier k1-Setting

The multiplier ‘k1-Setting’ enables the characteristic to be shifted. This is used for grading aseries of relays along a line to achieve discrimination.

For example, in the case of the “very inverse” characteristic, the constant c = 1 and the factork1 ≤ 13.5. The operating time t is given by the equation

1

1B

kt

I

I

Assuming a grading time of 0.5 s at 6 times the base current IB is required, the factor k1 foreach of the relays is given by

k1 = 5 t

For operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s, this results in the following settings for k1:

t [s] k1 [s]

0.5 2.5

1 5

1.5 7.5

2 10

2,5 12.5

The characteristics according to BS 142 are set as follows:

• normal inverse: k1 = 0.14 s• very inverse: k1 = 13.5 s• extremely inverse: k1 = 80 s• long time earth fault: k1 = 120 s

Typical settings

• IB-Setting corresponding to load current of the protected unit• IStart 1.1 IB• c-Setting according to desired characteristic for the protected unit• k1-Setting according to the time grading calculation• tmin 0.00

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

98 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 105: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.4 Directional overcurrent definite time protection 67(DIROCDT)

5.4.1 Mode of operationGUID-65CB2975-ADFB-4D2B-8923-3A0C57A02EB7 v1

Directional overcurrent function:

• detecting phase faults on ring lines• detecting phase faults on double-circuit lines with an infeed at one end• backup protection for a distance protection scheme

5.4.2 FeaturesGUID-0502CD95-362C-4826-9B26-32533106C57C v1

• Directional phase fault protection• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics• Voltage memory feature for close faults

5.4.3 Inputs and outputs

5.4.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-B92FE713-87AB-48C5-B7E3-B2C694BEF819 v1

• Current• Voltage

5.4.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-35EB42DC-C990-4FAD-A2BB-F917C4FD096A v1

• Blocking• PLC receive

5.4.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-4742C8ED-8E75-406E-8618-E7BF2947A0F1 v1

• Start• Start L1• Start L2• Start L3• Forwards measurement• Backwards measurement• Tripping

5.4.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-67F086A8-8A33-44FD-AC5C-097F44217914 v1

• Current amplitude of the three phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)• Active power• A positive measurement indicates the forwards direction (IL1 × UL2L3, IS × UL3L1, IL3 ×

UL1L2)• Voltage amplitude of the phase-to-phase voltages (UL2L3, UL3L1, UL1L2)

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 99Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 106: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.4.4 Function settingsGUID-06F853AD-FD0E-4322-8662-E2E4E857BA98 v1

Table 72: Directional overcurrent definite time function - settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet4..1 P1 (Select)

CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr CT I1-I3

VoltageInp CT/VT-Addr VT U1-U3

I-Setting IN 2.00 0.20 20.00 0.01

Angle Deg 45 -180 +180 15

Delay s 1.00 0.02 60.00 0.01

tWait s 0.20 0.02 20.00 0.01

MemDirMode Select Trip (Select)

MemDuration s 2.00 0.20 60.00 0.01

Receive BinaryAddr Always on

Ext Block BinaryAddr Always off

Trip SignalAddr

Start SignalAddr

Start L1 SignalAddr

Start L2 SignalAddr

Start L3 SignalAddr

MeasFwd SignalAddr

MeasBwd SignalAddr

5.4.5 ParametersGUID-99FB9719-852F-4D10-A8C8-3BC3F9811CE2 v1

Table 73: Directional overcurrent definite time function - parameters

Signal Description

ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive.

CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel. Only three-phase CTs can be set.

VoltageInp Defines the VT input channel. Only three-phase VTs can be set.

I-Setting Pick-up setting for tripping.

Angle Characteristic angle.

Delay Delay between pick-up and tripping.

tWait Time allowed for the directional decision to be received from the opposite endin a blocking scheme.

MemDirMode Determines the response of the protection after the time set for memorizingpower direction:

• trip• block

MemDuration Time during which the power direction last determined remains valid.

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

100 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 107: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

Receive Input for the signal from the opposite end of the line:

• T: not used• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Ext Block • F: not blocked• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Trip Tripping signal.

Start Pick-up signal.

Start L1 L1 phase pick-up signal

Start L2 L2 phase pick-up signal

Start L3 L3 phase pick-up signal

MeasFwd Signals measurement in the forwards direction.

MeasBwd Signals measurement in the backwards direction.

5.4.6 ConfigurationGUID-5C6F55A5-DC42-47E0-AA26-B7C71F60D35A v1

The following parameters have to be set:

• Pick-up current I-Setting• Characteristic angle Angle• Delay Delay• Time allowed for receipt of signal tWait• Response at the end of the memorized power direction time MemDirMode• Time during which the memorized direction is valid MemDuration

Pick-up value I-Setting

I-Setting must be selected high enough to prevent false tripping or alarms from taking placeand low enough to reliably detect the minimum fault current. The setting must be more thanthe maximum transient load current and allow for:

• CT and relay inaccuracies• the reset ratio

The maximum transient load current has to be determined according to the power systemoperating conditions and take account of switching operations and load surges.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 101Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 108: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

I

0 t

I

I N

I - Setting

Delay

18000040-IEC19000445-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000445 V1 EN-US

Figure 41: Operating characteristic of the definite time over-current detector

Where the rated CT current IN1 differs from the rated current IGN of the protected unit,compensating the measurement to achieve a match is recommended. This is done bycorrecting either the reference value of the A/D input or the setting.

For example, assuming IGN = 800 A and IN1 = 1000 A, the setting to pick up at 1.5 IGN = 1200 Ashould be:

1

8001.5 1.5 1.2

1000

GN

N

I A

I A

Characteristic angle

Determining the phase-angle of the current provides an additional criterion for preservingdiscrimination compared with non-directional overcurrent protection. The directionalsensitivity is ±180° in relation to the reference voltage. This is illustrated in the followingdiagram.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

102 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 109: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000041-IEC19000446-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000446 V1 EN-US

Figure 42: Directional characteristic

The function determines the power direction by measuring the phase-angle of the current inrelation to the opposite phase-to-phase voltage. Which current is compared with whichvoltage can be seen from the following table:

Table 74: Currents, voltages used for determination of power direction

Current input Phase-to-neutral voltage Calculated voltage

IL1 UL2, UL3 UL2L3 = UL2 - UL3

IL2 UL3, UL1 UL3L1 = UL3 - UL1

IL3 UL1, UL2 UL1L2 = UL1 - UL2

The voltage measurement automatically compensates the group of connection of the VTs. Forexample, the phase-to-phase values are calculated for Y-connected VTs (VT type UTS), whilethe input voltages are used directly for delta-connected VTs (VT type UTD).

Delay

The delay enables the protection to be graded with other time-overcurrent relays to achievediscrimination. Its setting is thus chosen in relation to the timer settings of upstream anddown-stream protective devices. The zone of protection covered by the overcurrent protectionextends to the next overcurrent protection device.

Should in the event of a fault in the next downstream zone, the protection for that zone fail,this protection function takes over after the time set for Delay and clears the fault in a backuprole.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 103Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 110: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Time allowed for a signal to be received

Where directional functions are configured in both line terminals, each can send a signal fromthe MeasBwd output to the Receive input of the function at the opposite end of the line (forexample, via a PLC channel) when it is measuring a fault in the reverse direction. This signalprevents the respective directional overcurrent function from tripping, because the faultcannot be in the zone between them. The functions therefore have to allow time, that is, thewait time, for the signal from the opposite line terminal to be received. If none is receivedwithin tWait, the circuit-breakers are tripped at both ends.

The time set for Delay acts in this type of scheme as a backup, which does not rely on thecommunication channel. Thus, when the Receive input is being used, the setting for Delaymust be longer than the setting for tWait:

Delay > tWait

Response after decay of the memorized voltage

The voltage measured by the protection can quickly decay to almost zero for a close fault andmake determining direction unreliable. For this reason, the function includes a voltagememory feature which for the first 200 milliseconds after the start of an overcurrentmemorizes the voltage measured immediately before it and this is used as reference todetermine fault direction. After this time, the last valid direction is used for an adjustableperiod.

MemDirMode provides facility for setting how the protection must respond after this time orin the event that the circuit-breaker is closed onto a fault and no voltage could be memorizedbeforehand. The two possible settings are the protection can trip or it can block.

Time during which the memorized direction is valid

The MemDuration setting determines how long the last valid direction measurement shall beused. The setting should be as short as possible (200 ms) when the function is being used asbackup for a distance function in an HV power system, because an actually measured voltageis only available during this time and therefore it is only possible to detect a reversal ofdirection during this time. For longer settings, the last valid power direction is used instead ofthe actually memorized voltage.

5.5 Directional overcurrent inverse time protection 67(DIROCINV)

5.5.1 Mode of operationGUID-F34E6B2E-4EEB-4BDC-BB79-7CDA8BE8C034 v1

Directional inverse time overcurrent function for:

• detecting phase faults on ring lines• detecting phase faults on double-circuit lines with an infeed at one end• backup protection for a distance protection scheme

5.5.2 FeaturesGUID-DF5218ED-8A78-4AB6-BB78-13B1B75FFC11 v1

• Directionally sensitive three-phase phase fault protection• Operating characteristics according to British Standard BS 142:

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

104 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 111: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

c = 0.02 : normal inverse

c = 1 : very inverse and long time earth fault

c = 2 : extremely inverse

• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics• Voltage memory feature for close faults

5.5.3 Inputs and outputs

5.5.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-BF590066-EAD6-44A1-93E8-312890FCE7E0 v1

• Current• Voltage

5.5.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-BD06D555-60CE-4A51-9077-81CE1142256E v1

• Blocking• PLC receive

5.5.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-C59C9A87-BD2E-4EE1-9A71-847ADC642458 v1

• Start• Start L1• Start L2• Start L3• Forwards measurement• Backwards measurement• Tripping

5.5.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-D59AA2D3-FAEF-4F61-B7A1-1C8C6BA71BB7 v1

• Current amplitudeAmplitude of the three-phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)

• Active powerA positive measurement indicates the forwards direction (IL1 × UL2L3, IL2 × UL3L1, IL3 × UL1L2)

• Voltage amplitudeAmplitudes of the phase-to-phase voltages (UL2L3, UL3L1, UL1L2)

5.5.4 Function settingsGUID-E0DE2E94-EF62-4944-AE37-55CC917D3A30 v1

Table 75: Directional overcurrent inverse time function - settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet4..1 P1 (Select)

CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr CT I1-I3

VoltageInp CT/VT-Addr VT U1-U3

I-Setting IN 2.00 0.20 20.00 0.01

Angle Deg 45 -180 +180 15

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 105Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 112: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

Delay s 1.00 0.02 60.00 0.01

tWait s 0.20 0.02 20.00 0.01

MemDirMode Select Trip (Select)

MemDuration s 2.00 0.20 60.00 0.01

Receive BinaryAddr Always on

Ext Block BinaryAddr Always off

Trip SignalAddr

Start SignalAddr

Start L1 SignalAddr

Start L2 SignalAddr

Start L3 SignalAddr

MeasFwd SignalAddr

MeasBwd SignalAddr

5.5.5 ParametersGUID-DF58F896-C3D7-4D23-98CE-4191FF983E9D v1

Table 76: Directional overcurrent inverse time function - parameters

Signal Description

ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive

CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel. Only three-phase CTs can be set

VoltageInp Defines the VT input channel. Only three-phase VTs can be set

I-Setting Pick-up current at which the characteristic becomes effective

Angle Characteristic angle

c-Setting Setting for the exponential factor determining the operating characteristicaccording to BS 142

k1-Setting Constant determining the parallel shift of the characteristic (time grading)

t-min Definite minimum operating time, operating characteristic constant

IB-Setting Base current for taking account of differences of rated current IN

twait Time allowed for the directional decision to be received

MemDirMode determines the response of the protection after the time set for memorizingpower direction:

• trip• block

MemDuration Time during which the power direction last determined remains valid.

Receive Input for the signal from the opposite end of the line:

• T: not used• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Ext Block • F: not blocked• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Trip Tripping signal

Start Pick-up signal

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

106 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 113: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

Start L1 L1 phase pick-up signal

Start L2 L2 phase pick-up signal

Start L3 L3 phase pick-up signal

MeasFwd Signals measurement in the forwards direction

MeasBwd Signals measurement in the backwards direction

5.5.6 ConfigurationGUID-B154716D-1084-4355-AAFC-CE606CA7C94E v1

The following parameters have to be set:

Base current IB-Setting

Characteristic enabling current IStart

Type of characteristic c-Setting

Multiplier k1-Setting

Characteristic angle Angle

Time allowed for receipt of signal tWait

Response at the end of the memorized power direction time MemDirMode

Time during which the memorized direction is valid MemDuration

Base current IB-Setting

A tripping current is not set on a directional overcurrent inverse function as it is on a definitetime overcurrent function. Instead the position of the characteristic is chosen such that it isabove the load current. The function, however, has a base current setting, which is set to thefull load current IB1 of the protected unit. The base current setting determines the position ofthe basic characteristic. The characteristic is enabled when the base current is exceeded by apreset amount (IStart). The adjustment of the base current IB to the load current IB1 of theprotected unit instead of its rated current enables for:

• IB1 < rated current of prot. unit: more sensitive protection• IB1 > rated current of prot. unit: maximum utilization of the thermal capability of the

protected unit

For example:

• Load current of the protected unit IB1 = 800 A• CT rated current IN1 = 1000 A• IN2 = 5 A• Protection rated current IN = 5 A

Protection base current: Setting:

21

1

5800 4

1000

NB B

N

I AI I A A

I A

40.8

5

B

N

I A

I A

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 107Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 114: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

An alternative is to adjust the position of the characteristic to match the rated load of theprotected unit and set the base current to its rated current instead of its load current.

Enabling the characteristic IStart

The characteristic is enabled when the current exceeds the setting IStart. A typical setting forIStart is 1.1 IB.

Choice of characteristic c-Setting

The constant c-Setting determines the shape of the characteristic.

The settings for the standard characteristics according to BS 142 are:

normal inverse: c = 0.02

very inverse and long timeearth fault:

c = 1.00

extremely inverse: c = 2.00

t

I

IStart

IB

t =

k1

I

IB

c

1

tmin18000042-IEC19000447-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000447 V1 EN-US

Figure 43: Operating characteristic of the directional overcurrent inverse time function

Multiplier k1-Setting

The multiplier k1-Setting enables the directional overcurrent inverse time characteristic to beshifted. This is used for grading a series of relays along a line to achieve discrimination.

For example, in the case of the very inverse characteristic, the constant c = 1 and the factor k1 ≤13.5. The operating time t is given by the equation:

1

1B

kt

I

I

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

108 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 115: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Assuming a grading time of 0.5 s at 6 times the base current IB is required, the factor k1 foreach of the relays is given by,

k1 = 5 t

For operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s, this results in the following settings for k1:

t [s] k1 [s]

0.5 2.5

1 5

1.5 7.5

2 10

2,5 12.5

The characteristics according to BS 142 are set as follows:

normal inverse: k1 = 0.14 s

very inverse: k1 = 13.5 s

extremely inverse: k1 = 80 s

long time earth fault: k1 = 120 s

Characteristic angle

Determining the phase-angle of the current provides an additional criterion for preservingdiscrimination compared with non-directional overcurrent protection. The directionalsensitivity is ±180° in relation to the reference voltage. This is illustrated in the followingdiagram.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 109Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 116: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000044-IEC19000449-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000448 V1 EN-US

Figure 44: Directional characteristic

The function determines the power direction by measuring the phase-angle of the current inrelation to the opposite phase-to-phase voltage. Which current is compared with whichvoltage can be seen from the following table:

Table 77: Currents, voltages used for determination of power direction

Current input Phase-to-neutral voltage Calculated voltage

IL1 UL2, UL3 UL2L3 = UL2 - UL3

IL2 UL3, UL1 UL3L1 = UL3 - UL1

IL3 UL1, UL2 UL1L2 = UL1 - UL2

The voltage measurement automatically compensates the group of connection of the VTs. Forexample, the phase-to-phase values are calculated for Y-connected VTs (VT type UTS), whilethe input voltages are used directly for delta-connected VTs (VT type UTD).

Time allowed for a signal to be received

Where directional functions are configured in both line terminals, each can send a signal fromthe MeasBwd output to the Receive input of the function at the opposite end of the line (forexample, via a PLC channel) when it is measuring a fault in the reverse direction. This signalprevents the respective directional overcurrent function from tripping, because the faultcannot be in the zone between them. The functions therefore have to allow time, that is, thewait time, for the signal from the opposite line terminal to be received. If none is receivedwithin tWait, the circuit -breakers are tripped at both ends.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

110 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 117: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

The time set for Delay acts in this kind of scheme as a backup which does not rely on thecommunication channel. Thus when the Receive input is being used, the setting for Delay mustbe longer than the setting for tWait:

Delay > tWait

Response after decay of the memorized voltage

The voltage measured by the protection can quickly decay to almost zero for a close fault andmake determining direction unreliable. For this reason, the function includes a voltagememory feature and for the first 200 milliseconds after the incidence of an overcurrent, thevoltage measured immediately before the fault is used as reference to determine faultdirection.

After this time, the last valid direction is used for an adjustable period.

MemDirMode provides facility for setting how the protection must respond after this time orin the event that the circuit-breaker is closed onto a fault and no voltage could be memorizedbeforehand. The two possible settings are the protection can trip or it can block.

Time during which the memorized direction is valid

The MemDuration setting determines how long the last valid direction measurement shall beused. The setting should be as short as possible (200 ms) when the function is being used asbackup for a distance function in an HV power system, because an actually measured voltageis only available during this time and therefore it is only possible to detect a reversal ofdirection during this time. For longer settings, the last valid power direction is used instead ofthe actually memorized voltage.

5.6 Definite time over- and undervoltage protection 59/27(OVDT)

5.6.1 Mode of operationGUID-F6B02B2E-018D-461C-B3B6-4D6EE83D2E82 v1

Standard voltage applications (overvoltage and undervoltage function)

5.6.2 FeaturesGUID-DCE098A7-D900-43B1-A3F8-4C2F1CC68D9B v1

• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics• Single or three-phase voltage measurement• Maximum value, respectively minimum value detection in the three-phase mode

5.6.3 Inputs and outputs

5.6.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-200D6EFF-67E4-44C5-9699-9B30B2E6D32A v1

• Voltage

5.6.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-41F14722-531C-4106-8B7E-A60E806F41C3 v1

• Blocking

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 111Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 118: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.6.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-5275B141-2101-42B7-AD0D-978F0A957C8B v1

• Pick-up• Tripping

5.6.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-F4ACA098-AEAB-4E13-AB3C-962041125C10 v1

• Voltage amplitude

5.6.4 Function settingsGUID-72811AEC-9706-47BE-8109-C03D393F0379 v1

Table 78: Definite time over- and undervoltage function - settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)

Delay s 02.00 0.02 60.00 0.01

V-setting UN 1.200 0.010 2.000 0.002

MaxMin MAX (1ph) (Select)

NrOfPhases 001 1 3 2

VoltageInp AnalogAddr 0

BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off

Trip SignalAddr

Start SignalAddr

5.6.5 ParametersGUID-7D6408F1-C98B-4A4E-8DA6-0958CF9614AA v1

Table 79: Definite time over- and undervoltage function - parameters

Signal Description

ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active

Delay Time delay between the function picking up and tripping

V-setting Voltage setting for tripping

MaxMin Over- or undervoltage mode selection:Settings:

• MIN (3ph): Undervoltage. Three-phase functions detect the highest phasevoltage. Not permitted for single-phase functions.

• MIN (1ph): Undervoltage. Three-phase functions detect the lowest phasevoltage.

• MAX (3ph): Overvoltage. Three-phase functions detect the lowest phasevoltage. Not permitted for single-phase functions.

• MAX (1ph): Overvoltage.Three-phase functions detect the highest phasevoltage.

NrOfPhases Number of phases included in the measurement.

VoltageInp Analogue input channelAll the voltage channels are available for selection.

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

112 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 119: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

BlockInp Input for blocking the function.

• F: not blocked• T: blocked• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Trip Tripping signal

Start Pick-up signal

5.6.6 ConfigurationGUID-3BEB8035-50E3-42E4-A31B-F0BF4F40B9CB v1

The following parameters have to be set:

Setting V-setting

Delay Delay

Over or undervoltage MaxMin

Number of phases NrOfPhases

Two of these functions are frequently applied in a two-stage scheme. The first stage detectslower prolonged overvoltages while the second guards against higher overvoltages, whichhave to be cleared quickly.

Pick-up voltage (V-setting)

Single-phase VT: A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130 V at the input ofthe VT.

Y-connected three-phase VTs: A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130V / √3at the input of the VT(phase-to-neutral voltage).

Compensating any difference between the rated voltages of VTs UN1 and protected unit UGN isrecommended. This is achieved with the aid of the reference value of the A/D channel or bycorrecting the voltage setting.

For example, for UGN = 12 kV and UN1 = 15 kV, the setting for a pick-up voltage of 1.4 UGN shouldbe:

1

121.4 1.4 1.12

15

GN

N

U kV

U kV

MaxMin

This parameter provides a choice of the following settings:

• MIN (3ph): Protection picks up when all three-phase voltages have fallen below setting.• MIN (1ph): Protection picks up when the lowest of the phase voltages falls below setting.• MAX (3ph): Protection picks up when all three-phase voltages have exceeded setting.• MAX (1ph): Protection picks up when the highest of the phase voltages exceeds setting.

Operating characteristic of a two-stage overvoltage protection

(UN = rated relay voltage)

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 113Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 120: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

180000044-IEC19000449-1-en.vsdx

Stage 1

Stage 2 V-Setting

UN

U

t Delay Delay

V-Setting

IEC19000449 V1 EN-US

Figure 45: Operating characteristic of a two-stage overvoltage protection

Typical settings:

1st stage:

V-setting 1.15 UN

Delay 2 s

MaxMin MAX (1ph)

2nd stage:

V-setting 1.4 UN

Delay 0.1 s

MaxMin MAX (1ph)

5.7 Synchrocheck 25 (SYNC)

5.7.1 Mode of operationGUID-213AD84F-1A1E-4464-BD6F-19471C0152F5 v1

Checking the synchronization criteria (amplitudes, phase-shift and frequency difference) oftwo electrical systems and, providing the corresponding limits are satisfied, enabling them tobe connected in parallel.

5.7.2 FeaturesGUID-77360B06-0E90-4F91-9363-5FA0E9CF3BA9 v1

• Monitoring synchronism:Single-phase voltage measurement.Comparison of the voltages (dU), phase-shift (dPh) and frequencies (df) of two voltagevectors. Calculation of the corresponding differences between the voltage vectors in thecomplex plane.Evaluation of the fundamental frequency components of the voltage signals (afterfiltering of harmonic and DC components).

• Monitoring voltage:

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

114 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 121: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

• Busbar voltage — single-phase voltage measurement• Line voltage — single or three-phase voltage measurement

Evaluation of instantaneous values (non-digitally filtered analogue signals) resulting in alarge permissible frequency range. Detection of the largest and smallest of the three-phase voltages in the case of three-phase measurement.No filtering of harmonics or DC component.

• Choice of phase for the voltage inputs on busbar and line sides (for amplitude and phase-angle adjustment).

• Additional voltage input (for use in double busbar stations) with provision for remoteswitchover.

• Provision for remote selecting the operating mode.

5.7.3 Inputs and outputs

5.7.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-B6579214-65E0-4A16-8A18-2349524AA637 v1

• Voltages (2 or 3 single or three-phase inputs) for:

• uBusInput1, uBusInput2 — single-phase• uLineInput — single or three-phase

5.7.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-15699343-8DDD-4FB4-A0A1-7DD8B563FD8F v1

• 2 inputs for enabling the synchrocheck function (ReleaseInp1 and ReleaseInp2)• 3 inputs for interlocking the synchrocheck O/Ps (BlckTrigBus1, BlckTrigBus2 and

BlckTrigLine)• 1 input for bypassing the synchrocheck function (OverridSync)• 2 inputs for remotely selecting operating mode (OpModeInp1 and OpModeInp2)• 2 inputs for remotely switching voltage channels in double busbar stations (uBus1Activ

and uBus2Activ)

5.7.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-83C56EC6-18F3-47A2-B316-731024859B8B v1

• Function pick-up (Start)• Circuit-breaker closing enable signal (PermitToClos)• Function disabled signal (SyncBlockd)• Enable output blocked signal (TrigBlockd)• Synchrocheck bypassed signal (OverridSync)• Amplitude difference in permissible range (AmplDifOK)• Phase-shift in permissible range (PhaseDifOK)• Frequency difference in permissible range (FreqDifOK)• Busbars energized (LiveBus)• Busbars de-energized (DeadBus)• Line energized (LiveLine)• Line de-energized (DeadLine)

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 115Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 122: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.7.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-E7D295D8-0041-4598-9D4D-135C13AB5E80 v1

Synchronism check (single-phase)

Voltage amplitude difference (|dU|) = |UBus - ULine|

Phase-shift (dPh) = PhBusbar - PhLine

Frequency difference (|df|) = |fBus - fLine|

Voltage check (single or three-phase)

• Max. busbar voltage (MaxuBus)• Min. busbar voltage (MinuBus)• Max. line voltage (MaxuLine)• Min. line voltage (MinuLine)

Single-phase: max. voltage = min. voltage

Three-phase: max. voltage = max. phase-to-phase voltage

min. voltage = min. phase-to-phase voltage

5.7.4 Function settingsGUID-6C0DF96A-18C4-4CC6-9AE8-078FDDBC55CA v1

Table 80: Synchrocheck function - settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet 1..4 P1 (Select)

maxVoltDif UN 0.20 0.05 0.40 0.05

maxPhaseDif deg 10.0 05.0 80.0 05.0

maxFreqDif Hz 0.20 0.05 0.40 0.05

minVoltage UN 0.70 0.60 1.00 0.05

maxVoltage UN 0.30 0.10 1.00 0.05

Operat.-Mode only SynChck (Select)

supervisTime s 0.20 0.05 5.00 0.05

t-Reset s 0.05 0.00 1.00 0.05

uBusInp-Ph 1ph L1-L2 (Select)

uBusInput1 AnalogAddr 0

uBusInput2 AnalogAddr 0

uLineInp-Ph 1ph L1-L2 (Select)

uLineInput AnalogAddr 0

uBus1Activ BinaryAddr Always on

uBus2Activ BinaryAddr Always off

ReleaseInp1 BinaryAddr Always on

ReleaseInp2 BinaryAddr Always off

BlckTrigBus1 BinaryAddr Always off

BlckTrigBus2 BinaryAddr Always off

BlckTrigLine BinaryAddr Always off

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

116 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 123: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

OverridSync BinaryAddr Always off

OpModeInp1 BinaryAddr Always off

OpModeInp2 BinaryAddr Always off

PermitToClos SignalAddr

Start SignalAddr

SyncBlockd SignalAddr

TrigBlockd SignalAddr

SyncOverrid SignalAddr

AmplDifOK SignalAddr

PhaseDifOK SignalAddr

FreqDifOK SignalAddr

LiveBus SignalAddr

DeadBus SignalAddr

LiveLine SignalAddr

DeadLine SignalAddr

5.7.5 ParametersGUID-807730B5-4894-45C2-AAE8-1A6B658C4617 v1

Table 81: Synchrocheck function - parameters

Signal Description

ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters aparticular function is active.

maxVoltDif Max. permissible voltage difference |dU| between the phasesused for checking synchronism.

maxPhaseDif Max. permissible phase-shift |dPh| between the voltages ofthe phases used for checking synchronism.

maxFreqDif Max. permissible difference of frequency |df| between thephases used for checking synchronism.

minVoltage Voltage level for discriminating between busbar and linebeing live (lowest phase voltage in the case of three-phasemeasurement).

maxVoltage Voltage level for discriminating between busbar and linebeing dead (highest phase voltage in the case of three-phasemeasurement).

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 117Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 124: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

Operat.-Mode Possible synchrocheck operating modes:

• SynChck only: Synchrocheck [Synchrocheck conditionsfulfilled AND (bus live AND line live)]

• BusD AND LineL: Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND linelive)

• BusL AND LineD: Synchrocheck OR (bus live AND linedead)

• BusD XOR LineD: Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND linelive) OR (bus live AND line dead)

• BusD AND LineD: Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND linedead)

• BusD OR LineD: Synchrocheck OR (bus dead OR linedead)

• BusD: Synchrocheck OR (bus dead)• LineD: Synchrocheck OR (line dead)

supervisTime Period between the function picking up and it issuing the CBclose enable (PermitToClos).All the conditions forsynchronism must remain fulfilled during this time,otherwise the function is reset.

t-Reset Reset time following the non-fulfillment of one or moresynchronism conditions.

uBusInp-Ph Choice of phase I/P on the busbar side.Possible settings: 1 ph L1L2, L2L3 or L3L1; 1 ph L1E, L2E or L3EThe phase chosen must agree with the voltage input channelselected (that is, uBusInput1 and, if selected, uBusInput2).

uBusInput1 1st voltage I/P channel on the busbar side.This must agree with the phase chosen (uBusInp-Ph).

uBusInput2 2nd voltage input channel (if applicable) on the busbar side.This must agree with the chosen phase (uBusInp-Ph) andmust agree with the voltage of uBusInput1. If a second inputis not configured, the function only takes account of the firstvoltage I/P channel (uBusInput1).

uLineInp-Ph Choice of phase input on the line side.Possible settings:1 ph L1L2, L2L3 or L3L1; 1 ph L1E, L2E or L3E; 3 ph Y; 3 ph ΔThe phase chosen must agree with the voltage I/P channelselected (that is, uLineInput).

uLineInput Voltage input channel on the line side.This must agree with the chosen phase (uLineInp-Ph).

uBus1Activ, uBus2Activ1)

Binary inputs for remote switching between voltage inputchannels connected to double busbars (mimic busbar).These inputs shall be applied only if the second busbar inputchannel has been configured (‘uBusInput2’).

• F: input disabled• T: input enabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

118 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 125: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

ReleaseInp1ReleaseInp2

Binary inputs for enabling the synchrocheck function(internal OR gate, that is, at least one of the inputs has to beset to TRUE (T) or controlled by a binary input to enable theoutput). If both inputs are FALSE (F), the function does notrun, that is, the supervision algorithm is not processed.These inputs are used where the synchrocheck function isonly needed at certain times (for example, in autoreclosureschemes).

• F: synchrocheck function disabled• T: synchrocheck function enabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

BlkSynchBus1BlkSynchBus2BlkSynchLine2)

Binary inputs for interlocking the enabling signals at theoutput of the synchrocheck function.These would be typically controlled by fuse failure equipment(MCBs) monitoring the VT circuits.

• F: blocking input disabled• T: blocking input continuously enabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

OverridSync Binary input for bypassing the synchrocheck function.Thispermits an enabling signal (PermitToClose) regardless ofwhether the synchronism conditions are fulfilled or not. Itoverrides the function’s blocking and other enabling inputs.

• F: input not used• T: SC enabling output (PermitToClose) continuously

active• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

OpModeInp1OpModeInp23)

Binary inputs for remotely selecting the operating mode:

• F: input disabled• T: input continuously enabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

PermitToClose Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is enablingclosure of the circuit-breaker.It is generated at the end of the measuring period(supervisTime) and remains active for as long as thesynchronism conditions are fulfilled, or until a blocking signalis received, or the synchrocheck function resets.

Start Signal generated at the instant the conditions forsynchronism are fulfilled for the first time.

SyncBlockd Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is disabled,that is, both the inputs synchEnable1 and synchEnable2 areset to FALSE (F), and that the synchrocheck algorithm hasbeen discontinued.

TrigBlockd The CB close enabling inputs are blocked (one or moreblocking I/Ps are at logical 1), but the synchrocheckalgorithm continues to run.

SyncOverrid Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is bypassedand a CB close enabling signal is being generated(PermitToClose) regardless of whether the synchronismconditions are fulfilled or not.

AmplDifOK Signal indicating that the voltage difference |dU| betweenthe phases used for checking synchronism has fallen belowthe value of the parameter maxVoltDif.

PhaseDifOK Signal indicating that the phase-shift |dPh| between thephases used for checking synchronism has fallen below thevalue of the setting of maxPhaseDif.

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 119Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 126: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

FreqDifOK Signal indicating that the difference of frequency |df|between the phases used for checking synchronism hasfallen below the value of the setting of maxFreqDif.

LiveBus Signal indicating that the busbar is energized. (U >minVoltage)

DeadBus Signal indicating that the busbar is de-energized. (U <‘maxVoltage’)

LiveLine Signal indicating that the line is energized. (U > minVoltage)

DeadLine Signal indicating that the line is de-energized. (U <maxVoltage)

1) See Table 82.2) Parts of the function effected by the blocking inputs:

Assuming that both busbar input channels have been configured (double busbars), the active blocking inputdepends on the statuses of the binary inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ:See Table 83.Assuming that only the first busbar input channel has been configured —BlckTrigBus1 and BlckTrigLine areactive.The active blocking inputs are connected internally to an OR gate and the CB close enabling outputs areblocked, if one of them is set to TRUE (T).

3) See Table 84.

Table 82: uBus1Activ, uBus2Activ

uBus1Activ uBus2Activ Selected voltage input

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE uBusInput1 active

(F) FALSE (T) TRUE uBusInput2 active

Other conditions The previous blocking input remains active.

Table 83: BlkSynchBus1, BlkSynchBus2, BlkSynchLine

uBus1Activ uBus2Activ Selected voltage input

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE BlckTrigBus1 and BlckTrigLine

(F) FALSE (T) TRUE BlckTrigBus2 and BlckTrigLine

Other conditions The previous blocking input remains active.

Table 84: OpModeInp1, OpModeInp2

OpModeInp1 OpModeInp2 Operating-Mode

(F) FALSE (F) FALSE Mode specified in the control program (Operat.-Mode)

(F) FALSE (T) TRUE Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND line live)

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE Synchrocheck OR (bus live AND line dead)

(T) TRUE (T) TRUE Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND line live) OR (bus liveAND line dead)

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

120 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 127: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.7.6 Configuration

5.7.6.1 GeneralGUID-F67E0F03-7DED-47F7-AF69-50DD405DD480 v1

It is only permissible to connect two energized parts of a power system, if the differencebetween the amplitudes of their voltages and the phase-shift between them are withinacceptable limits.

The purpose of the synchrocheck function is to determine these parameters and decidewhether it is permissible to connect the systems in parallel.

The function thus issues an enable signal (PermitToClose), providing the voltages of the twosystems are higher than the set minimum voltage (minVoltage) and

• the difference between the voltage amplitudes |dU|• the phase-shift |dPh|• the difference between the frequencies |df|

do not exceed the limits set for the parameters maxVoltDif, maxPhaseDif and maxFreqDif forthe adjustable time supervisTime.

According to the operating mode (Operat.-Mode) selected, the function also permits de-energized parts of a power system to be coupled.

Provision is also made for switching between voltage inputs belonging to the busbars of adouble busbar station by appropriately controlling two binary inputs (uBus1Activ anduBus2Activ).

Note that the function can only check the synchronism of two voltages at any one time, that ofone of the busbars and that of the line.

The synchrocheck function is therefore used mainly:

• to connect infeeds in parallel and to connect outgoing feeders to the system• to interconnect two synchronous or asynchronous parts of a power system• in autoreclosure schemes• as a safety check when carrying out manual switching operations.

Application example: Feeder connected to double busbars

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 121Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 128: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000045-IEC19000450-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000450 V1 EN-US

Figure 46: Principle of synchrocheck scheme

Figure 5.7.6.1 shows the principle of the synchrocheck scheme for determining the instantwhen it is permissible to connect a feeder to the power system. The voltages of busbar SS2and the line are monitored.

Where:

SS1, SS2: busbar 1, busbar 2

VT SS1, VT SS2, VT Line: VTs on busbar 1, busbar 2 and line

T1, T2: Isolators on busbars 1 and 2

CB: Circuit-breaker

uBusInput1, uBusInput2: Voltage input channels on the busbar side

uLineInput: Voltage input channel on the line side

BlckTrigBus1, BlckTrigBus2: Inputs for blocking the synchro-BlSyncLine check function by the VT fusefailure equipment

uBus1Activ, uBus2Activ: Binary inputs for switching between the analogue busbar voltage inputs inaccordance with the configuration of the isolators (mimic busbar)

5.7.6.2 Parameters to be setGUID-658DA938-FF60-44EA-BB99-96C62BC6136C v1

Max. voltage difference |dU| maxVoltDif

Max. phase-shift |dPh| maxPhaseDif

Max. frequency difference |df| maxFreqDif

Minimum voltage level for monitoring(determination of whether plant isenergized)

minVoltage

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

122 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 129: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Maximum voltage level for monitoring (determination of whether plant is de-energized)

maxVoltage

Choice of operating mode Operat.-Mode

Measuring period (delay before issuing enable) supervisTime

Reset delay t-Reset

Choice of phase for monitoring on the busbar side uBusInp-Ph

Choice of phase for monitoring on the line side uLineInp-Ph

Monitoring the conditions for synchronism (maxVoltDif, maxPhaseDifand maxFreqDif)

The determination of voltage difference, phase-shift and frequency difference is performedfor just one of the phases of the three-phase system. For this purpose, the analogue values arefirst filtered by a digital Fourier bandpass filter (to obtain the fundamentals) and then theorthogonal components UBus and ULine are derived.

The phase-shift dPh between the voltages and the difference between their amplitudes dU arecalculated from the corresponding vector diagram in the complex plane.

Synchrocheck function

Monitoring the conditions for synchronism:

18000046-IEC19000451-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000451 V1 EN-US

Figure 47: Monitoring the conditions for synchronism

where:

• UBus, ULine : complex vectors for UBus and ULine• ωB, ωL : angular velocities for U bus and U line• dU = U bus − U line• dPhi = PhiB − PhiL

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 123Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 130: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

The frequency difference df is obtained by determining the rate at which the phase-shiftbetween the voltage vectors varies:

d

df dPhi B Ldf

The conditions for synchronism are fulfilled, providing the values of the resulting variables arewithin the limits set for maxVoltDif, maxPhaseDif and maxFreqDif.

Typical values are:

• maxVoltDif: 0.2 UN• maxPhaseDif: 10°• maxFreqDif:

• 50 mHz for connecting largely synchronous parts of a stable closely meshed systemor where high demands with regard to synchronism have to be fulfilled.

• 100 mHz in autoreclosure schemes with long dead times (for example, three-phaseslow reclosure) or for autoreclosure of short transmission lines

• 200 mHz in autoreclosure schemes with short dead times, but where high slipfrequencies are to be expected

The setting of the synchronism measuring period (supervisTime) must bechosen to correspond to the settings for the maximum phase-shift andmaximum frequency difference.

Monitoring the voltage in two power systems (minVoltage, maxVoltage)

The determination of voltage amplitude can be either based on monitoring a single phase orall three phases depending on how the particular AnalogAddr is configured. If the three phasesare included, then the highest voltage of the three is detected for the maximum limit,respectively the lowest of the three for the minimum limit.

In order to be able to monitor the voltages in a wide frequency range, instantaneous values aremeasured (instead of digitally filtered analogue voltages).

The voltage detectors may be used to determine whether a system is de-energized orenergized:

• A system is considered to be de-energized, if its voltage (highest of the three phases inthe case of three-phase measurement) falls below the setting of the parametermaxVoltage.

• A system is considered to be energized, if its voltage (lowest of the three phases in thecase of three-phase measurement) exceeds the setting of the parameter minVoltage.

• On no account will an enable signal permitting closure of the circuit-breaker be issued,should the voltage lie between the limits of maxVoltage and minVoltage.

Typical values are:

• minVoltage 0.70 UN• maxVoltage 0.30 UN

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

124 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 131: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Choosing the operating mode of the synchrocheck function (‘Operat.-Mode’)

Basically, an enable signal will always be issued, if the conditions for synchronism (dU, dPh anddf) are fulfilled for the prescribed period and both systems, that is, busbar and line, areenergized (voltage > minVoltage).

In cases where closure of the circuit-breaker should also be enabled when one system is de-energized (voltage < maxVoltage), for example, connection of a radial feeder, this can beachieved by appropriately setting the parameter Operat.-Mode:

Table 85: Setting of Operat.-Mode

Operat.-Mode Closure enabled when:

Only SyncChk Synchronism conditions fulfilled AND (busbar > minVoltage AND line >minVoltage)

BusD & LineL Only SyncChk OR (busbar < maxVoltage AND line > minVoltage)

BusL & LineD Only SyncChck OR (busbar > minVoltage AND line < maxVoltage)

BusD XOR LineD Only SyncChk OR (busbar < maxVoltage AND line > minVoltage) OR (busbar> minVoltage AND line < maxVoltage)

BusD & LineD Only SyncChk OR (busbar < maxVoltage AND line < maxVoltage)

BusD OR LineD Only SyncChk OR (busbar < maxVoltage OR line < maxVoltage)

BusD Only SyncChk OR busbar < maxVoltage)

LineD Only SyncChk OR line < maxVoltage)

Remote operating mode selection

Four of the five operating modes can be selected by external signals applied to two of thefunction’s binary inputs (OpModeInp1 and OpModeInp2).

Table 86: Operating modes selected by external signals

Binary input signals Operating-ModeOpModeInp1 OpModeInp2

(F) FALSE (F) FALSE Mode specified in the control program (Operat.-Mode)

(F) FALSE (T) TRUE Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND line live)

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE Synchrocheck OR (bus live AND line dead)

(T) TRUE (T) TRUE Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND line live) OR (bus liveAND line dead)

Choice of phase for the voltage inputs on the busbar and line sides(uBusInp-Ph, uLineInp-Ph)

The phase voltage (uBusInp-Ph, uLineInp-Ph) to be used for determining synchronism can beentered separately for busbar and line inputs (to facilitate individual adjustment of phase-angle and amplitude).

All single and three-phase voltages are available for line voltage setting (1ph L1L2, L2L3 or L3L1;1ph L1E, L2E or L3E; 3ph Y; 3ph Δ) and all single-phase voltages for bus voltage setting(1ph L1L2, L2L3 or L3L1; 1ph L1E, L2E or L3E), but the ones chosen must agree with the settingfor the corresponding input channels (see Section 5.7.4).

Where both busbar inputs are in use, the definition of the phase (‘uBusInp-Ph’) applies to bothbusbars.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 125Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 132: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Notes

• A phase-to-phase measurement is to be preferred for a single-phasevoltage measurement. If a single-phase input has to be chosen on bothsides, the same phase should be used wherever possible.

• If a three-phase Y-connection is selected, phase-to-phase voltages areformed internally. This reduces the harmonic content and enables thefunction to continue to be used in ungrounded systems, which arerequired to remain in service with a single ground fault.

• According to the setting for uBusInp-Ph and uLineInp-Ph, either one phaseor all three phases are monitored. Whether or not the conditions forsynchronism (dU, dPh and df) are fulfilled is determined on the basis of asingle phase, whereby the following conditions apply:

• Where three phases are monitored on busbar and line sides, thephase-to-phase potential UL1L2 is the one extracted for furtherprocessing.

• Should a three-phase measurement be defined on one side and asingle-phase on the other, then the single-phase voltage set for thesingle-phase input is used on both sides.

Measuring period (supervisTime), reset time (t-Reset), operating time ofthe function and dead time of any autoreclosure function

Measuring period (supervisTime):

This adjustable delay time, which is initiated at the end of the pick-up time, is the periodduring which all the conditions for synchronism must be continuously fulfilled to permitclosure of the circuit-breaker. The timer is reset should one of the parameters move out of thepermissible range.

Providing they all remain within their preset ranges, the enable signal (PermitToClose) isissued at the end of the measuring period.

Especially, in autoreclosure applications, it is of advantage to set the measuring period(supervisTime) in relation to the settings for Phase diff. and maxFreqDif. It also providesfacility for allowing for the operating time of the circuit-breaker.

2 (' PhaseDiff ')'supervisTime ' ( )

(' FreqDiff ') Hz 360s tv ts s

where:

• ts: circuit-breaker operating timeTypical range: 0 ... 100 ms

• tv: time required by the function to pick up(response by the function to transient phenomena in the input voltage and timertolerances):typically 60... 80 ms for values of supervisTime <200 mstypically 80... 100 ms for values of supervisTime ≥200 ms

The above setting for the measuring period ensures that for a constant frequency differencedf within the setting of maxFreqDif, the phase-shift dPh will still be inside the set permissibleangular range (- maxPhaseDif to + maxPhaseDif) at the end of the time supervisTime.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

126 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 133: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Typical values for a phase-shift setting (maxPhaseDif) of 10°:

maxFreqDif supervisTime

200 mHz 100... 200 ms

100 mHz 250... 450 ms

50 mHz 600...1000 ms

Minimum function operating time

The minimum operating time achieved by the function, that is, the shortest possible timebetween the instant the synchronism conditions are fulfilled for the first time and thegeneration of the signal enabling the circuit-breaker to be closed PermitToClose, is given bythe sum of the measuring time setting supervisTime and the pick-up response time tv of thefunction.

Minimum operating time = (supervisTime) + tv

Autoreclosure dead time

In an autoreclosure scheme, the dead time set for the autoreclosure function must be at leastas long as the minimum operating time of the synchrocheck function given above in order topermit the synchrocheck function to issue an enable signal (PermitToClose) within the deadtime:

Dead time ≥ minimum operating time = (supervisTime) + tv

Reset time (t-Reset)

From the instant that one or more of the synchronism conditions are no longer fulfilled, theenabling signal output (PermitToClose) and the pick-up signal reset after the time set fort‑Reset.

This ensures a CB closing signal can be maintained for a certain minimum time.

Typical value:

t-Reset 50 ms

Where high slip frequencies df are to be expected, t‑Reset must be shortenough to prevent the phase-shift from exceeding the set permissible range ofphase-angles (-PhaseDiff to + PhaseDiff) during the reset time.

5.7.6.3 Supplementary information for binary inputsGUID-622840DB-B163-4701-81B9-B8F3191E5563 v1

Inputs for switching between analogue busbar inputs (uBus1Activ,uBus2Activ)

Where the two busbar inputs (Bus I/P1 and Bus I/P2) have been configured for a double busbarinstallation, the measurement can be switched from one busbar to the other by signalscorresponding to the isolator positions applied to the inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ:

uBus1Activ uBus2Activ Analogue inputs for synchronisatiom

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE uBusInput1 and uLineInput

(F) FALSE (T) TRUE uBusInput2 and uLineInput

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 127Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 134: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Other combinations of the states of these two inputs do not result in any switching of theAnalogAddr channels and the prevailing situation is maintained.

• The function (timer, all measuring elements and the associated outputs) isautomatically re-initialised when busbar inputs are switched. Thisprocedure takes about 60 ms (internal response times). The function thenbegins to evaluate the new busbar voltage and from this instant onwardsthe generation of an enable signal (PermitToClose) relating to the newsystem configuration is possible.

• The two binary inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ shall be not used inconfigurations in which only one busbar input (uBusInput1) is defined.

Blocking inputs for preventing the synchrocheck function from issuing anenable signal (BlckTrigBus1, BlckTrigBus2, BlckTrigLine)

These are assigned to the corresponding voltage inputs and used mainly when the VT circuitcan be interrupted by fuse-failure equipment (miniature circuit-breakers). In such cases, theblocking inputs are connected to auxiliary contacts on the fuse-failure equipment. Thisprecaution eliminates any risk of the synchrocheck function permitting the closure of a circuit-breaker onto a line it considers to be de-energized, which in reality is under voltage.

Function of the blocking inputs:

• Both busbar voltage inputs have been configured:Which of the blocking inputs is enabled depends on which of the busbar inputsuBus1Activ and uBus2Activ is active, that is, on which voltage input is active:

uBus1Activ uBus2Activ Active blocking inputs

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE BlckSyncBus1 and BlckSyncLine

(F) FALSE (T) TRUE BlckSyncBus2 and BlckSyncLine

Other combinations of the states of these two inputs do not influence the blocking inputsand the prevailing situation is maintained.

• If only one busbar voltage input is configured, all the blocking I/Ps (BlkSyncBus1,BlkSyncBus2 and BlckTrigLine) are enabled regardless of the states of the binary I/PsuBus1Activ and uBus2Activ.

The active blocking inputs are connected to an OR function so that a logical 1 from any one ofthem causes all the measuring elements and the associated outputs (start, AmplDifOK,PhaseDifOK, FreqDifOK, LiveBus, LiveLine, DeadBus and DeadLine) and also the enablingoutput (PermitToClose) to reset. The algorithm of the synchrocheck function, however,continues to run.

Inputs for enabling the synchrocheck function (ReleaseInp1, ReleaseInp2)

Since the synchrocheck function is only required during the relevant switching operations andautoreclosure cycles, it may be blocked at all other times to save processor time. The binaryinputs ReleaseInp1 and ReleaseInp2 are used for this purpose. Internally they are the inputs ofan OR gate, so that at least one must be active before the synchrocheck program will run.

If neither of the two enabling signals is at logical 1, processing of the algorithm ceases. All thefunction’s measuring element outputs also reset immediately and any circuit-breaker closeenabling signal (PermitToClose) resets after the time set for t‑Reset.

Conditional enabling of the synchrocheck function is especially recommended, where it has tooperate in conjunction with other functions in the same unit such as distance protection,

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

128 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 135: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

which are critical from the operating time point of view, so as not to adversely influence theirtripping times.

Application example

The scheme below shows a synchrocheck function in the same unit as the distance protectionand autoreclosure functions. The synchrocheck function is only required during the dead timesof the autoreclosure function. This is achieved by connecting the inverted output signalAR ready generated by the autoreclosure function to the binary I/P ReleaseInp1 (orReleaseInp2) of the synchrocheck unit.

Synchro-

check

Distance

function Auto-

reclosure

function

Start

Trip CB

Trip CB 3P

SynchroChck

Binary

circle

Close CB

AR ready

ReleasInp1

18000047-IEC19000452-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000452 V1 EN-US

Figure 48: Block diagram showing the interconnections between the functions for ascheme with conditional enabling of the synchrocheck function

Input for bypassing the synchrocheck function (OverridSync)

A signal applied to this binary input causes a PermitToClose signal to be generatedimmediately regardless of whether the conditions for synchronism are fulfilled or not.

This input overrides all other blocking or enabling inputs.

5.8 Autoreclosure 79 (AR)GUID-C9F0769D-51E8-4D70-857D-019C7F3C578F v1

5.8.1 Mode of operationGUID-866541F5-4D5B-4E45-8A2C-468F6825B5E4 v1

The function can be configured for single or three-phase auto-reclosure.

The unit can operate in conjunction with either of the two protection functions (distance andovercurrent protection) and either an internal or external synchrocheck function.

5.8.2 FeaturesGUID-CE6ACA20-0BA0-4B60-B22E-F9FD9AB495F9 v1

• Up to 4 fast or slow reclosure attempts• First cycle with up to 4 individually configurable single and/or three-phase reclosure

attempts• Independent operating indicators for each reclosure cycle• Wide dead time setting range• Provision to control bypassing of the synchrocheck unit and extending the dead time for

the first zone by external signals• Clearly defined response to changing fault conditions during the dead time (evolving

faults)

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 129Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 136: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.8.3 Inputs and outputs

5.8.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-8E6CA574-82C1-4527-8C65-CFEF76D88382 v1

• None

5.8.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-1D0928D6-6742-473B-83D8-FF23EC79F524 v1

Start (Start)

Redundant start (Start 2) *)

Redundant start (Start 3) *)

Three-phase trip (Trip CB 3P)

Redundant three-phase trip (Trip CB2 3P) *)

Redundant three-phase trip (Trip CB3 3P) *)

General trip (Trip CB)

Redundant general trip (Trip CB2) *)

Redundant general trip (Trip CB3) *)

CB ready for open/close/open cycle (CB ready)

CB2 ready for open/close/open cycle (CB2 ready) **)

CB ready for close/open cycle (CO Ready)

CB2 ready for close/open cycle (CO Ready 2) **)

CB open (CB open)

CB2 open (CB2 open **)

CB2 preferred circuit-breaker (CB2 Priority) **)

Synchrocheck (SynchroChck)

Synchrocheck 2 (SynchroChck2) **)

Dead line (Dead Line)

Dead line 2 (Dead Line2) **)

External blocking input (ExtBlkAR)

Conditional blocking input (CondBlkAR)

Manual close blocking input (Manual Close)

External synchrocheck bypass (Ext.SCBypas)

External extension of dead time (Extend t1)

Delay from master CB (MasterDel)

Block from master CB (MasterUnsucc)

Block reclosure by follower (redundant scheme) (Inhibit Inp)

External 1P-1P selector for 1st. AR (MD1_EXT_1P_1P)

External 1P-3P selector for 1st. AR (MD1_EXT_1P_3P)

External 1P3P-3P selector for 1st. AR (MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P)

Ext. 1P3P-1P3P select. for 1st. AR (MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P)

Remark:*) 2 and 3 denote the inputs of protection functions 2 and 3 or relays 2 and 3 in a redundant protectionscheme.**) 2 denotes the inputs for CB2 in a duplex scheme.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

130 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 137: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.8.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-A8B580BC-1416-4340-8E66-5E91C43D1665 v1

CB close signal (Close CB)

CB2 close signal (Close CB2) **)

Overreach switching signal (ZExtension)

Definitive trip (Def. Trip)

Prepare trip of all three phases (Trip 3-Pol)

Block Follower CB (BlkFlwr)

Delay Follower CB (DelFlwr)

Block for Follower recloser (Inhibit Outp)

Reclosure function ready (AR Ready)

Reclosure function blocked (AR Blocked)

Reclosure cycle running (AR in prog.)

1st single-phase reclosure in progress (First AR 1P)

1st three-phase reclosure in progress (First AR 3P)

2nd Reclosure in progress (Second AR)

3rd reclosure in progress (Third AR)

4th reclosure in progress (Fourth AR)

Remark:**) 2 denotes the inputs for CB2 in a duplex scheme.

5.8.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-FC4B02BD-9787-4B7B-870B-725CAE54A890 v1

• None

5.8.4 Function settingsGUID-EFD006C2-2320-4D06-BF6F-D1EF2609EFFE v1

Table 87: Autoreclosure function - settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)

1. AR Mode 1P3P-1P3P (Select)

2..4. AR Mode off (Select)

t Dead1 1P s 001.20 0.05 300 0.01

t Dead1 3P s 000.60 0.05 300 0.01

t Dead1 Ext. s 001.00 0.05 300 0.01

t Dead2 s 001.20 0.05 300 0.01

t Dead3 s 005.00 0.05 300 0.01

t Dead4 s 060.00 0.05 300 0.01

t Oper s 000.50 0.05 300 0.01

t Inhibit s 005.00 0.05 300 0.01

t Close s 000.25 0.05 300 0.01

t Discrim.1P s 000.60 0.10 300 0.01

t Discrim.3P s 000.30 0.10 300 0.01

t Timeout s 001.00 0.05 300 0.01

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 131Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 138: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

t AR Block s 005.00 0.05 300 0.01

Start BinaryAddr Always off

Trip CB 3P BinaryAddr Always off

Trip CB BinaryAddr Always off

Start 2 BinaryAddr Always off

Trip CB2 3P BinaryAddr Always off

Trip CB2 BinaryAddr Always off

Start 3 BinaryAddr Always off

Trip CB3 3P BinaryAddr Always off

Trip CB3 BinaryAddr Always off

CB Ready BinaryAddr Always off

CO Ready BinaryAddr Always off

CB Open BinaryAddr Always off

Dead line BinaryAddr Always off

Ext. Blk AR BinaryAddr Always off

Cond.Blk AR BinaryAddr Always off

Manual Close BinaryAddr Always off

Inhibit Inp. BinaryAddr Always off

Extend t1 BinaryAddr Always off

MD1 EXT 1P 1P BinaryAddr Always off

MD1 EXT 1P 3P BinaryAddr Always off

MD1 EXT 1P3P3P

BinaryAddr Always off

MD1 EXT 1P3P1P3P

BinaryAddr Always off

Close CB SignalAddr

Trip 3-Pol SignalAddr

Def. Trip SignalAddr

AR Ready SignalAddr

AR in Prog. SignalAddr

AR Blocked SignalAddr

First AR 3P SignalAddr

First AR 1P SignalAddr

Second AR SignalAddr

Third AR SignalAddr

Fourth AR SignalAddr

Inhibit Outp SignalAddr

SCBypas 1P off (Select)

SCBypas 1P3P off (Select)

Ext.SCBypas BinaryAddr off (F)

SynchroChck BinaryAddr off (F)

ZE Prefault on (Select)

ZE 1. AR off (Select)

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

132 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 139: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ZE 2. AR off (Select)

ZE 3. AR off (Select)

ZE 4. AR off (Select)

ZExtension SignalAddr

Master mode off (Select)

MasterDelay BinaryAddr Always off

Mast.noSucc BinaryAddr Always off

DelayFlwr. SignalAddr

Blk.toFlwr. SignalAddr

CB2 Ready BinaryAddr Always off

CO Ready 2 BinaryAddr Always off

CB2 open BinaryAddr Always off

SynchroChck2 BinaryAddr Always off

Dead line 2 BinaryAddr Always off

Close CB2 SignalAddr

CB2 Priority BinaryAddr Always off

5.8.5 ParametersGUID-4AC6C85E-84E0-452F-99FF-1267506E048E v1

Table 88: Autoreclosure function - parameters

Signal Description

ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active.

1. AR Mode • 1. 1P-1P —single-phase trip and reclosure for ground faults (single-phase deadtime), no reclosure for phase faults

• 1. 1P-3P —single-phase trip followed by three phase trip after approx. 20 ms,three-phase reclosure for ground faults (three-phase dead time initiated bysingle-phase trip), no reclosure for phase faults

• 1. 1P3P-3P —three-phase trip and reclosure for earth and phase faults(three-phase dead time)

• 1. 1P3P-1P3P —single-phase trip and reclosure for ground faults (single-phasedead time), three-phase trip and reclosure for phase faults (three-phase deadtime)

• Ext. Wahl —External selection by the binary inputsMD1_EXT_1P_1P, MD1_EXT_1P_3P, MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P and MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P

2…4AR Mode Maximum number of reclosure attempts (all three-phase)

• off —no 2nd, 3rd or 4th reclosure• 2 AR —2 reclosures• 3 AR —3 reclosures• 4 AR —4 reclosures

t Dead1 1P Dead time for first single-phase reclosure

t Dead1 3P Dead time for first three-phase reclosure

t Dead1 Ext. Extension of 1st dead time for single or three-phase reclosure Effective as long as alogical 1 (pulse or continuous) is applied to the Extend t1 I/P before the dead timefinishes (falling edge).

t Dead2 2nd dead time

t Dead3 3rd dead time

t Dead4 4th dead time

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 133Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 140: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

t Oper Maximum duration of a fault for AR

t Inhibit Period (CB recovery time) from the falling edge of the last reclosure attempt duringwhich the autoreclosure function is blocked and after which the function is reset.In the event of an evolving fault between discrimination and dead times, the periodcommences at the instant of another trip occurring between the two times.The inhibit timer is also started if the protection trips after the fault duration timet Oper has elapsed.

t Close Duration of CB close signal

t Discrim.1P Evolving fault discrimination time for single-phase reclosure

t Discrim.3P Evolving fault discrimination time for three-phase reclosure

t Timeout Period following the dead time during which the CB close signal has to occur. If itdoes not, the Def. Trip signal is generated.

t AR Block Time during which reclosure is blocked. t AR Block is started by every blockingsignal (Ext.Blk AR, Cond.Blk. AR, Manual Close, Inhibit Inp and MasternoSucc).

Start1)

Input for signaling the start of a reclosure cycle. This I/P is connected to the Generalstart signal of a protection function.

Trip CB 3P

Input for the three-phase trip signal. The three-phase trip from a protectionfunction is connected to this input.

Trip CB I/P for the general trip signal. The general trip from a protection function isconnected to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.

Start 2 Input for the AR start signal.In redundant protection schemes, the general start signal from the 2nd protectionis connected to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.

Trip CB2 3P Input for the three-phase trip signal.In redundant protection schemes, the general tripping signal from the 2ndprotection is connected to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.

Trip CB2 Input for the general trip signal.In redundant protection schemes, the general trip signal from the 2nd protection isconnected to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.

Start 3 Input for the AR start signal.The general start signal from the 3rd protection can be connected to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.

Trip CB3 3P Input for the three-phase trip signal.The three-phase tripping signal from the 3rd protection can be connected to thisinput.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.

Trip CB3 Input for the general trip signal.The general trip signal from the 3rd protection can be connected to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.

CB Ready Input excited by a signal from the CB when it is ready (open/close/open).Set to on (T or True), if not needed or not fitted.Input logic: CB ready OR CB2 readyIn a duplex scheme, either an active CB ready or CB2 ready I/P enables anautoreclosure cycle.Resetting of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms.

CO Ready Input excited by a signal from the CB when it is ready for a close/open cycle.Set to on (T or True) if not needed, not fitted and Dead line or ExtSCBypas not used.Input logic for enabling the closing command: [(synchrocheck AND CO Ready) ORDead line OR ExtSCBypas].

CB Open Input excited by a signal from the CB when it is open.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.To avoid the operation of fast circuit-breakers from being blocked unintentionally,the effect of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms.

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

134 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 141: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

Dead line Input indicating that the line is de-energized (CB open input if the VTs are on thebusbar side).Set to off (F or False), if not needed.An active input overrides the following logical relationship of the inputs:synchrocheck AND CO Ready.

Ext. Blk AR Input for blocking the internal autoreclosure function.Even an autoreclosure cycle that is in progress is immediately blocked by a signalapplied to this input.The output signals Trip 3 Pol and Def Trip are generated and a three-phasedefinitive trip takes place.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.

Cond. Blk. AR Input for a conditional blocking signal.Blocking only when AR cycle is not in progress.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.When tripping is by the distance protection SOTF logic or a directional ground faultPLC signal, the corresponding signals can be connected to this input to preventautoreclosure.

Manual Close Blocking input excited by the manual CB close signal.Even an autoreclosure cyclethat is in progress is immediately blocked by a signal applied to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.

Inhibit Inp. Input for blocking the follower reclosure function in a redundant scheme. Thefollower is blocked from the end of the master closing signal until the end of thereclaim time.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.

Extend t1 Input for conditionally extending the dead time (single and three-phase) for the first(fast) reclosure.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.

MD1_EXT_1P_1PMD1_EXT_1P_3PMD1_EXT_1P3P_3PMD1_EXT_1P3P_1P3P

Inputs for externally selecting the mode for the first reclosure. They are onlyeffective when the parameter 1. AR Mode is set to Ext. select.Unused inputs must be set to off (F or False). If a signal is applied to more than oneinput, the next mode in the list is the one that is active. The autoreclosure functionis blocked if none of the inputs is used.

Close CB CB close signal

Trip 3-Pol Signal to the distance function so that it can only carry out a three-phase trip.This signal is inverted and connected to the distance protection I/P 1P AR. Thissignal is active in many situations, but particularly when the AR function is blocked,the CB is not ready for AR, the CB is open, the single-phase discrimination time t 1PDiscrim finishes or the output signal First AR 3P is active.It resets at the end of reclaim time.

Def. Trip Signal initiating definitive tripping of the CB.This signal is normally active when the protection trips again after the lastprogrammed reclosing shot or trips while the AR function is blocked. The signalresets after a fixed time of 500 ms.

AR Ready Signal AR function ready for a reclosure cycle. This signal is active when the ARfunction is ON and standing by and also during the closing command.

AR in Prog. Signal indicating that a reclosure cycle is in progress.This signal is active from the beginning of the dead time until the end of the lastreclosure attempt.

AR Blocked Signal indicating that the autoreclosure relay is blocked.

First AR 3P Signal 1st three-phase reclosure attempt in progress.

First AR 1P Signal 1st single-phase reclosure attempt in progress.

Second AR Signal 2nd reclosure attempt in progress (three-phase).

Third AR Signal 3rd reclosure attempt in progress (three-phase).

Fourth AR Signal 4th reclosure attempt in progress (three-phase).

Inhibit Outp Signal for blocking the follower AR function in a redundant scheme.This signal is active from the end of the master AR close command to the end of thereclaim time.

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 135Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 142: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

SCBypas 1P Bypass of the synchrocheck and close/open ready signals for the first single-phasereclosure:

• on —First single-phase reclosure not enabled by synchrocheck and close/openready signals (bypass always active).

• off —First single-phase reclosure enabled by the synchrocheck and close/openready signals(bypass inactive).

SCBypas1P3P Bypass of the synchrocheck and close/open ready signals for the first single orthree-phase reclosure:

• on —First reclosure not enabled by synchrocheck and close/open ready signals(bypass always active).

• off —First reclosure enabled by synchrocheck and close/open ready signals(bypass inactive).

Ext.SCBypas Bypasses the synchroChck and CO Ready signals. Set to off (F or False), if notneeded.Input logic for enabling the close command: [(synchrocheck AND CO Ready) ORDead line OR Ext.SCBypas].Input logic for enabling the close command: [(synchroChk2 AND CO Ready 2) ORDead line OR Ext.SCBypas].

SynchroChck Input for a signal from a synchrocheck relay.Set to on (T or True), if not needed, not fitted and Dead line or ExtSCBypas not used.Input logic: [(Synchrocheck AND CO Ready) OR Dead line OR Ext.SCBypas].

ZE Prefault Distance relay reach setting before the first fault:

• on —overreaching (ZExtension signal active)• off —underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)

ZE 1. AR Distance relay reach after the first reclosure attempt:

• on —overreaching (ZExtension signal active)• off —underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)

ZE 2. AR Distance relay reach after the second reclosure attempt:

• on —overreaching (ZExtension signal active)• off —underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)

ZE 3. AR Distance relay reach after the third reclosure attempt:

• on —overreaching (ZExtension signal active)• off —underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)

ZE 4. AR Distance relay reach after the fourth reclosure attempt:

• on —overreaching (ZExtension signal active)• off —underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)

ZExtension Signal to the distance function to switch it to overreach or enable an overcurrentfunction with a short delay.

Master Mode (For 1½ breaker and redundant schemes.)Selection of an autoreclosure function to be Master:

• on —Master output signals transmitted• off —Master outputs blocked

MasterDelay Input for a signal delaying the closing command from the follower reclosurefunction.This signal picks up when the dead time of the master reclosure function starts andis reset either by a new trip after the last reclosure of the cycle or at the end of thewait time following successful reclosure by the master.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.

Table continues on next page

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

136 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 143: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

Mast.noSucc Input for a blocking signal from the master CB.This signal is triggered by the rising edge of the Def.Trip output from the masterreclosure function and resets after a fixed time of 500 ms.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.

DelayFlwr. Signal to delay the follower CB for as long as the master circuit-breaker has notcompleted its autoreclosure cycle.The signal picks up at the start of master AR dead time and is reset either by therising edge of the Def.Trip output or the falling edge of the Close CB output afterthe time tClose.

Blk.toFlwr Signal to block the follower CB as long as reclosure of the master CB isunsuccessful.The excursion of this signal is the same as for the Def Trip output.

CB2 Ready Input excited by a signal from CB2 when it is ready (open/close/open).Set to off (F or False), if not needed or not fitted.Input logic: CB ready OR CB2 readyIn a duplex scheme, the autoreclosure cycle is enabled either by an active CB readyor CB2 ready input.Resetting of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms.

CO Ready 2 Input excited by a signal from CB2 when it is ready for a close/open operation.Set to on (T or True), if not needed, not fitted and Dead line 2 is not used.Input logic for enabling the close command: [(synchrocheck2 AND CO Ready 2) ORDead line 2 OR ExtSCBypas].

CB2 open I/P excited by a signal from CB2 when it is open.Set to on (T or True), if not needed. Observe the information given for the duplexlogic in a duplex scheme.

SynchroChck2 Input for a signal from a synchrocheck function belonging to CB2.Set to on (T or True), if not needed, not fitted and Dead line 2 or ExtSCBypas notused.Input logic for enabling the close command: [(synchrocheck2 AND CO Ready 2) ORDead line 2 OR ExtSCBypas].

Dead line 2 Input indicating that line 2 is de-energized (CB2 open and VTs 2 on the busbar side).Set to off (F or False), if not needed.An active input overrides the following logical relationship of the inputs:synchrocheck 2 AND CO Ready 2.

Close CB2 Close CB2 signal (duplex)

CB2 Priority Input for determining the preferred circuit-breaker:off (F or False) CB1 is preferred circuit-breakeron (T or True) CB2 is preferred circuit-breakerIf both circuit-breakers are closed before a fault, only the preferred circuit-breakerperforms the entire autoreclosure cycle. The other circuit-breaker closes either aftersuccessful autoreclosure or when the close command to the preferred circuit-breaker is not enabled (missing CO Ready or Synchrocheck).

1) For the autoreclosure function to operate correctly, at least the Start and Trip CB 3P inputs must beconnected to a protection function or via a binary I/P to an external protection relay.

5.8.6 Configuration

5.8.6.1 GeneralGUID-DFA37C03-18E1-4EE9-9F28-FBA0371C66FB v1

The autoreclosure function can perform from 1 to 4 autoreclosure attempts. The first attemptcan be either single or three-phase while the subsequent attempts are always three-phase. Thetype and number are determined by the parameters 1. AR Mode (4 different modes for the 1streclosure cycle) and 2..4 AR Mode.

The function can operate in conjunction with either an external distance protection relay orother internal protection functions.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 137Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 144: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

It can also operate in a scheme comprising two or more protection functions.

5.8.6.2 Connections between autoreclosure and distance functionsGUID-6A5B98BA-F1BC-4111-847E-73E435ADDECC v1

The autoreclosure function determines from the states of the input signals start, Trip CB andTrip CB 3P, whether the distance protection has picked up and whether it has performed asingle or a three-phase trip. Only the Trip CB signal is generated for a single-phase trip,whereas both the Trip CB and Trip CB 3P signals are generated for a three-phase trip.

The external distance relay or internal distance function decides whether single or three-phasetripping should take place.

The autoreclosure function can send two signals to the distance protection. The Trip 3-Polsignal informs the distance protection whether it should perform a single or a three-phasetrip. The ZExtension signal switches the distance protection’s over-reaching zone on and off.

Where the SOTF logic is not required to operate during autoreclosure, connect the AR in prog.signal to the ExtBlkSOTF binary input of the distance function. The SOTF 10 s timer in thedistance function’s SOTF logic is normally activated for dead times <10 s and in this case theabove connection is not necessary.

If the SOTF logic initiates tripping, an autoreclosure cycle can be inhibited by connecting thestart SOTF from the distance function to the CondBlkAR input of the autoreclosure function.

18000048-IEC19000453-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000453 V1 EN-US

Figure 49: Distance and autoreclosure functions in the same unit

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

138 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 145: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000049-IEC19000454-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000454 V1 EN-US

Figure 50: Distance protection and autoreclosure functions in different units

5.8.6.3 Connections between autoreclosure and overcurrent functionsGUID-A6CF8718-6382-4229-8E4E-88F3788A1298 v1

To prevent the discrimination timer from operating, connect the overcurrent Trip signal to thetwo inputs Start and Trip CB 3P of the autoreclosure function.

The time t Close must be set longer than the maximum operating time of the activated(graded) overcurrent functions:

tClose from AR function > tmax. overcurrent time delay

In cases where the zone extension signal is used in conjunction with overcurrent functions, theterms ‘overreach’ and ‘underreach’ have the following meanings:

• overreach: enabling of an overcurrent function having a short (non-graded) time delay.• underreach: enabling of an overcurrent function having a long (graded) time delay.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 139Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 146: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

AR

Trip CB 3P

ZExtension

CB

ope

n

CB

Man

ua

l C

lose

C

O r

ea

dy

Clo

se C

B

REB500sys

OR

(Logic) O/C

O/C

Block

Trip

Trip

I1>, t1

I2>, t2

Start

18000050-IEC19000455-1-en.vsdx

IEC19000455 V1 EN-US

Figure 51: Overcurrent and autoreclosure functions in the same unit

where:

• t1 standard delay (0.5 ... 1.5 s)• t2 short delay (0.02 ... 0.2 s)• I1>, I2> pick-up value I set for Trip

5.8.6.4 Coordinating autoreclosure (AR) with first and second main protectionsGUID-6063E9EF-3D99-4AC7-A11C-4786D0A12FE7 v1

Provision is made for coordinating the operation of the autoreclosure function of mainprotection 1 with main protection 2.

To avoid any risk of mal-operation due to differing timer tolerances, precautions are necessaryto ensure that only one autoreclosure function is active per line terminal at any one time.

Main protection 1 (external device) and main protection 2 (REB500sys) are completelyindependent protection systems and if each has its own autoreclosure function (Figure 49),their operation has to be coordinated. As long as the AR function for main protection 1 is inoperation, that of main protection 2 is blocked. To this end, main protection 1 output COReady is connected to input 118205_Ext. Blk AR on the REB500sys bay unit. The startingsignals (Start L1L2L3) and tripping signals (Trip CB and Trip CB 3P) generated by theREB500sys distance function UZ(2) are connected to their own autoreclosure function AR(2)and to the autoreclosure function AR(1). The corresponding signals from the external distanceprotection UZ(1) are only connected to the external autoreclosure device AR(1). On the otherhand, the signal from AR(1) instructing the distance protection only to perform a three-phasetrip (Trip CB 3P) goes to both distance protection functions UZ(1) and UZ(2). The same signalfrom AR(2) only goes to distance protection UZ(2).

The autoreclosure unit AR(1) and the two distance protection functions UZ(1) and UZ(2) areactive in normal operation. An autoreclosure cycle can be initiated by either UZ(1) or UZ(2) asboth communicate with the autoreclosure device AR(1).

Whenever autoreclosure device AR(1) is in the not-ready state, autoreclosure device AR(2) isactivated and communicates with distance protection function UZ(2). AR(1) is generally fittedin the same bay unit as distance protection UZ(1) and a not ready status applies to bothfunctions. This means that distance protection and autoreclosure of the line are performed bymain protection 2 (REB500sys).

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

140 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 147: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

The Manual Master Mode is only useful for three-phase AR. For a single-phasetrip, a complex Fupla is required, which is not available in REB500.

18000051-IEC19000456-1-en.vsdx

UZ(2) Start RST

Trip CB

Trip CB 3P

1PolAR

ZExtension

AR(2) Start

Trip CB

Trip CB 3P

Trip 3-Pol

ZExtension

CB

open

CB

Manual C

lose

CO

Ready

Clo

se C

B

REB500sys

y

UZ(1)

Start RST

Trip CB

Trip CB 3P

1PolAR

ZExtensionAR

AR(1)

Start

Trip CB

Trip CB 3P

Trip 3-Pol

ZExtension

CB

open

CB

Manual C

lose

CO

Ready

Clo

se C

B

Ext.

Blk

. A

R

AR

Read

y

> = 1

> = 1

> = 1

> = 1

IEC19000456 V1 EN-US

Figure 52: Coordinating autoreclosure of main protection 1 with main protection 2

5.8.6.5 TimersGUID-6CEC8BC6-7684-4944-B5AB-AF62A7DDC672 v1

The timers have setting ranges extending up to 300 s in steps of 10 ms.

The purpose of each of the timers is described below.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 141Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 148: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Dead times (t Dead1 1P to t Dead 4)

Provided the trip signal is issued before t Oper elapses, the dead time is the period betweenthe tripping signal (Trip CB) and the close signal (Close CB).

The required dead time must be entered separately for each reclosure cycle. This necessitatessetting the following parameters: t Dead1 1P, t Dead1 3P, t Dead 2, t Dead 3 and t Dead 4.

Provision is made for externally switching the dead times t Dead1 1P and t Dead1 3P for thefirst (fast) reclosure attempt to a second setting. The corresponding additional time periodcan be set with the aid of the parameter t Dead 1 Ext and activated via the binary I/P Extendt1.

The second, third and fourth reclosure attempts are always three-phase.

Extended dead time (t Dead 1 Ext)

This time provides facility for extending the dead time (for example, should thecommunications channel be defective or for a redundant scheme with two autoreclosurefunctions). The extended dead time is enabled by the binary input Extend t1.

Maximum fault duration for a reclosure attempt (t Oper)

If a fault has persisted for some time, the probability of a successful reclosure reduces. Thelikelihood of the power system becoming unstable is also greater for an unsuccessfulautoreclosure attempt following a fault which has persisted for a long period. It is for thesereasons that the time after the inception of a fault during which reclosure can be initiated islimited. The fault duration is set using parameter t Oper.

The timer for the fault duration is started by the pick-up signal from the protection function(Start). Faults resulting in tripping after t Oper are locked out (Def. Trip) and reclosure doesnot take place.

Should the fault duration time expire before the protection trips, autoreclosure is blocked andthe reclaim time is started.

Example:

Time T Oper < Delay(2) of the distance function means that autoreclosure only takes place forfaults in the first distance zone (Delay(1)).

This function is not required for schemes that only use current functions. The binary inputsStart and Trip CB 3P are connected together (see Section 5.8.6.3).

Reclaim time (t inhibit)

One purpose of the inhibit time is to permit the circuit-breaker to recover its full voltagewithstand. To this end, it disables the autoreclosure function for the time set for parameter tinhibit after one of the following events:

• the last reclosing attempt• a definitive trip resulting from a protection trip after the fault duration time t Oper• a recurring trip between discrimination time and dead time (evolving fault, see output

signal Def. Trip).

Close signal duration (t Close)

The maximum duration of the circuit-breaker close signal (command output Close CB) isdetermined by the parameter t Close. Any tripping signal which occurs during this timeoverrides the close signal. A second, third or fourth reclosure attempt can only take place, ifthe next trip occurs within the time t Close.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

142 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 149: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Discrimination times (t 1P discrim. and t 3P discrim.)

The discrimination time determines the procedure in the event of a different kind of faultoccurring during the dead time (evolving fault), that is, one of the other two phases also picksup or the tripping signal resets and picks up again. The discrimination time is started togetherwith the dead time. Should a tripping signal recur due to an evolving fault between the expiryof the discrimination time and before the end of the dead time, the reclaim timer is startedand a definitive trip (Def. Trip) initiated. The dead time is also discontinued and the signal ARin prog. reset.

If the first fault was initially an earth fault and evolves during the time t Dead1 1P, but beforethe end of the discrimination time t Discrim 1P, the dead time t Dead1 3P is started and three-phase reclosure takes place.

The discrimination time t Discrim 3P is also needed for 2 or 1½ breaker schemes, where eachcircuit-breaker has its own autoreclosure function.

A typical setting for the parameters t Discrim 1P or t Discrim 3P for single- and three-phasereclosure is 50% of the shortest dead time.

The minimum permissible setting for the discrimination time is:

100 ms + CB time

The time t1EvolFaults during which a subsequent fault has to be detected(evolving or unsuccessful reclosure) is a distance function setting.

The distance protection parameter t1EvolFaults enables the time to be set during which asubsequent fault (evolving or unsuccessful reclosure) results in a three-phase trip, that is,every second trip by the distance protection function trips all three phases. The autoreclosurefunction also signals the switchover to three-phase tripping by exciting the signal Trip 3-Pol atthe end of the fault discrimination time t Discrim. 1P.

It is advisable to set the time t1EvolFaults longer than the autoreclosure dead time t Dead1 1P.

t Timeout

The parameter t Timeout determines the period after the dead time within which the closesignal must be issued, otherwise a Def.Trip is generated and no further reclosure attempt ismade. Before a close command is issued at the end of every dead time, the logic [(synchroChckAND CO ready) OR Dead Line OR ExtSCBypas)] is checked and the command only enabledproviding all the criteria are correct within the setting of t Timeout.

Blocking time (t AR Block)

The autoreclosure function can be enabled or disabled by the following binary input signals:

• ExtBlkAR also blocks during the reclosure cycle• Manual close also blocks during the reclosure cycle• Inhibit Inp also blocks during the reclosure cycle• CB Ready blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle• CB2 Ready blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle 1)• CO Ready blocks at the end of the reclosure cycle after expiry of the time t time-out• CO Ready 2 blocks at the end of the reclosure cycle after expiry of the time t time-out 1)• Mast.noSucc blocks the follower CB after an unsuccessful reclosure attempt by the

master• CondBlkAR blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle

1) 2 denotes the inputs for CB2 in a duplex scheme.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 143Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 150: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Should a CondBlkAR signal occur during a reclosure cycle (that is, the AR in prog. signal isactive), it only becomes effective from the end of the current reclosure cycle and providing it isstill active.

A reclosure cycle remains blocked for the duration of the set blocking time t AR Block after thelast binary input has been enabled. Blocking also takes place during initialization of theprotection relay when its auxiliary supply is switched on or the parameter settings are beingloaded.

5.8.6.6 Supplementary information for binary inputsGUID-BDAEAA7A-3A27-4EAE-8068-C824A6E3085A v1

Starting and tripping signals from the protection function: Start (Start 2,Start 3), Trip CB and Trip CB 3P (Trip CB2, Trip CB3, Trip CB2 3P, Trip CB33P)

It is necessary to configure the three input signals Trip CB (general trip), Trip CB 3P (three-phase trip) and Start to control the autoreclosure function. The normal procedure to achievethis is to select the distance protection signals via the sub-menu OUTPUT FROM FUNCTION.As the autoreclosure function is completely independent, signals from other functions mayalso be selected.

Circuit-breaker ready signals: CB ready and CO Ready (CB2 ready and COReady 2)

The inputs for the parameters CO Ready and CB ready (or CO Ready 2 and CB2 ready in aduplex scheme) must be connected to the circuit-breakers to signal that they are ready toperform a complete reclosure cycle. In cases where one of the inputs is not used, it must be setto TRUE.

An active CB ready signal informs the autoreclosure function that reclosure is permissible(that is, sufficient energy is available for a full open/close/open cycle).

Once a reclosure cycle has started, this signal is ignored because the pressure varies during areclosure cycle of an air-blast breaker.

Resetting of this signal is internally delayed by 100 ms.

The CO Ready signal (close-open cycle can be carried out) is only effective during a reclosurecycle, that is, during the dead time. Should there be insufficient energy to open the circuit-breaker again following closure, the close signal is disabled and a Def. Trip (definitive trip) isgenerated.

This input is only used in conjunction with circuit-breakers, which provide the correspondinginformation (C-O query), for example, spring-charged and air-blast circuit-breakers with twoswitching energy levels.

Circuit-breaker open CB open (CB2 open)

It is also necessary to include the initial status of the circuit-breakers to prevent one fromreceiving a close signal, which was already open before the fault occurred.

The binary input CB open (and CB2 open in a duplex scheme) is thus provided to determine theinitial status of a circuit-breaker.

The pick-up of these signals is delayed by 100 ms to prevent any unwanted blocking of fastcircuit-breakers.

A circuit-breaker which was already open before the Start signal was received (CB open atlogical 1) is not closed by the autoreclosure function.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

144 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 151: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Where a circuit-breaker does not provide the necessary information (CB open signal), the inputmust be permanently set to off (F or False). Providing the scheme is also not a duplex scheme(that is, only one CB), the binary input CB2 open must also be permanently set to on (T orTrue).

Accordingly, these are the default settings for CB open and CB2 open.

The AR function can then operate with a single circuit-breaker without a CB open signal orsuperfluous close signal.

De-energized line Dead Line (Dead Line 2) with checking of synchronismsynchroChck (synchroChck2)

Before the Close CB (or Close CB2) instruction can be issued, either the Dead line or thesynchroChck I/P (or Dead line 2 or synchroChck2 in a duplex scheme) must be at logical 1.

Logic: [(synchroChck AND CO ready) OR Dead Line OR ExtSCBypas]

Logic: [(synchroChck2 AND CO ready 2) OR Dead Line 2 OR ExtSCBypas]

External blocking ExtBlkAR and CondBlkAR'

The reclosure function is always blocked by an active ExtBlkAR input.

An active CondBlkAR input will only block the function, providing a reclosure cycle is notrunning (that is, the AR in prog. signal is at logical 0).

The Cond.Blk AR signal is necessary to prevent a reclosure cycle, when reclosure is notrequired for the first trip that occurs during t Oper. This is the case, for example, for trips bythe switch-onto-fault (SOTF) protection or by a directional ground fault protection via PLC.

To prevent the SOFT from initiating autoreclosure, the distance protection SOFT start signalmust be connected to the CondBlkAR input.

Manual close

The reclosure function is immediately blocked (for the blocking time t AR Block) by a Manualclose signal. This signal is also needed for the overreaching logic to switch the ZExtensionsignal to on.

External synchrocheck bypass signal ExtSCBypas

This input provides facility for bypassing the synchroChck and CO Ready (or SynchroChck2and CO Ready 2 for CB2) enabling inputs.

It is only active for the first fast three-phase or single-phase reclosure attempt.

External extension of the dead time Extend t1

A logical 1 at the Extend t1 input extends the dead times t Dead1 1P and t Dead1 3P by thesetting t Dead1 Ext for the first (fast) reclosure attempt. This could be necessary, for example,in the event of a communication channel failure or in a redundant scheme.

5.8.6.7 Supplementary information for binary outputsGUID-A2D01995-187A-4A39-B18E-A8F2EBBBE624 v1

The most important autoreclosure output is the Close CB command. This output and 14 otheroutputs are provided.

This signal picks up when the closing command is issued and resets at the end of the time tClose or earlier if there is a tripping occurs upon reclosing.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 145Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 152: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Status of the autoreclosure function (AR Ready and AR Blocked)

The signal AR Ready is generated when the autoreclosure function is ready to perform areclosure cycle and the signal AR Blocked when it is blocked.

The AR Ready signal is active providing a reclosure cycle is not blocked (no AR Blocked signal)and a dead time is not running.

The AR Ready signal is active during a reclose command for purposes of enabling thesynchrocheck function (see Section 5.7.6.3, Synchrocheck).

Autoreclosure cycle in progress

There are six signals which show that a reclosure cycle is running and which stage has beenreached:

• AR in prog. reclosure cycle in progress• First AR 1P first single-phase reclosure attempt• First AR 3P first three-phase reclosure attempt• Second AR second reclosure attempt• Third AR third reclosure attempt• Fourth AR fourth reclosure attempt

The signal AR in prog. picks up at the start of the dead time and is reset by the falling edge ofthe last reclose command.

Circuit-breaker closing signals Close CB and Close CB2'

The CB closing command is normally assigned to a output relay by correspondinglyconfiguring the parameter Close CB (also Close CB2 in a duplex scheme).

A trip subsequent to a close command during the time t Close +300 ms switches the deadtime step (second, third and fourth AR) or initiates a lock-out trip (depending on the setting).A close command is reset immediately after a trip.

Definitive trip Def. Trip

The Def. Trip signal indicates that the circuit-breaker will remain tripped and no furtherreclosure attempts will be made. The following conditions can cause a definitive trip:

• All reclosure attempts were unsuccessful.• A starting or tripping signal was generated after the discrimination time and before dead

time.• Tripping takes place while a reclosure cycle is blocked (either via the blocking input or by

the reclaim time).• The synchroChck (or Dead line) and/or CO Ready inputs were not enabled during t

Timeout due to lack of synchronism.• The CB open signal is still active 300 ms after the close signal has reset (that is, the CB has

not responded to the close signal).• The trip signal that followed the start signal occurred after the fault duration time t Oper.• Tripping occurred for a phase fault and the mode selected for the first reclosure cycle is

1P-1P or 1P-3P.

Perform three-phase trip Trip 3-Pol

The Trip 3-Pol output instructs the line protection to trip all three phases.

The signal can be externally or internally connected.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

146 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 153: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

This signal is generated automatically, if reclosure is blocked, CB Ready is inactive, the CB isopen, the single-phase discrimination time t1P Discrim has elapsed or the signal First AR 3P isactive.

Zone extension ZExtension

The setting of the autoreclosure parameter ZE Prefault determines the pre-fault reach of thedistance protection when the autoreclosure function is inactive (before the first fault), that is,setting ZE Prefault to on activates the output signal ZExtension which then switches thedistance function to overreach.

The parameters ZE 1. AR reach to ZE 4. AR reach provide facility for individually switching thereach for each reclosure attempt. Setting one of these parameters to on means that theZExtension output is at logical 1 and the distance relay is switched to overreach either beforefault occurrence or for the following reclosure attempt, otherwise the distance relay is set tounderreach.

With the exception of its first change of state when setting the ZEPrefault parameter to ON itresets together with the signal Trip CB or Trip CB 3P, this signal picks up and resets togetherwith the Close CB signal.

The distance relay is switched to overreaching for a Manual close.

It is switched to underreaching when the autoreclosure function is blocked.

Note also that the ZExtension signal is connected to the binary input ZEMode AR of the zoneextension logic in the distance protection function.

5.8.7 Timing diagramsGUID-EB943681-2270-41A7-81AC-C18A80DCAA35 v1

The time relationship between the various signals during operation of the autoreclosurefunction can be seen from the following diagrams.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 147Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 154: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000052-IEC19000457-1-en.vsdx

Tri p CB

Start

Close CB

ZExtension

Def. Trip

First AR 1P

Trip CB 3P

AR in Prog.

AR Ready

AR Blocked

t Dead1 1P

time < t Oper.

Trip 3-Pol

t Discrim. 1P

Trip CB

Start

Close CB

ZExtension

Def. Trip

First AR 1P

Trip CB 3P

AR in Prog.

AR Ready

AR Blocked

t Inhibit. t Dead1 1P

time < t Oper.

Trip 3-Pol

t Discrim. 1P

Unsuccessful AR

Successful AR

t Close

300 ms

IEC19000457 V1 EN-US

Figure 53: Timing diagram for a single or double busbar arrangement with one distanceand one AR function >> Response for ground fault

Settings:

• 1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P• 2..4. AR Mode = off• ZE Prefault = on• ZE 1. AR = off

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

148 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 155: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000053-IEC19000458-1-en.vsdx

t Inhibit.t Dead1 1P

time < t Oper.

t Discrim. 1P

t Close

300 ms

Trip CB

Start

Def. Trip

Trip CB 3P

AR in Prog .

AR Ready

AR Block ed

Trip 3-Pol

Successful AR (evolving fault du ring ‘t Di s crim1P’)

Close CB

ZExtension

First A R 1P

First A R 3P

time < t Oper.

t Dead1 1P

Trip CB

Start

Trip CB 3P

Unsuccessful AR (evolving fault within ‘t Dead1 1P’,

but after ‘t Di s crim1P’)

Close CB

ZExtension

Def. Trip

First A R 1P

AR in Prog .

AR Ready

AR Block ed

Trip 3-Pol

t Discrim. 1P

IEC19000458 V1 EN-US

Figure 54: Timing diagram for a single or double busbar arrangement with one distanceand one AR function >> Response for a ground fault which evolves

Settings:

• 1. AR Mode = 1P3P-1P3P• '2..4. AR Mode' = 'off'• ZE Prefault = on• ZE 1. AR = off

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 149Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 156: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000054-IEC19000459-1-en.vsdx

Trip CB 3P

Start

Close CB

ZExtension

Def. Trip

Trip CB

First AR 3P

Second A R

Third A R

time < t Oper.

Trip CB 3P

Start

Close CB

ZExtension

Def. Trip

Trip CB

First AR 3P

Second A R

Third A R

time < t Oper.

Unsuccessful AR

Successful AR

t Close

AR in Prog .

AR Ready

AR Blocked

t Dead1 3P t Dead2 t Dead3

Trip 3-Pol

AR in Prog .

AR Ready

AR Blocked

t Dead1 3P t Dead2 t Dead3 t Inhibit.

Trip 3-Pol

300 ms

IEC19000459 V1 EN-US

Figure 55: Timing diagram for a single or double busbar arrangement with one distanceand one AR function >> Response for phase faults

Settings:

• 1. AR Mode = 1P3P-1P3P,• 2..4. AR Mode = 3AR• ZE Prefault = on• ZE 1. AR = off,• ZE 2. AR = on• ZE 3. AR = off

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

150 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 157: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000055-IEC19000460-1-en.vsdx

Trip CB

Start

Close CB

ZExtension

Def. Trip

First AR 1P

Trip CB 3P

AR in Pro g.

AR Ready

AR Blocked

Trip 3-Pol

Main protection 2, AR blocked (because main protection 1 ready)

Main protection 1, AR ready

Trip CB

Start

Close CB

ZExtension

Def. Trip

First AR 1P

Trip CB 3P

AR in Pro g.

AR Ready

AR Blocked

t inhibit. t De ad1 1P

time < t Oper.

Trip 3-Pol

t D iscrim. 1P

t clo se

300 ms

IEC19000460 V1 EN-US

Figure 56: Timing diagram for scheme with main protections 1 and 2 (REB500sys), bothequipped with an autoreclosure function — Main protection 1 is in operation>> Response for successful autoreclosure

Settings:

• 1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P• 2..4. AR Mode = off• Zextension = on• ZE 1. AR = off

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 151Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 158: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000056-IEC19000461-1-en.vsdx

Main protection 2, AR active ( because main protection1 not ready)

Main protection 1, AR not ready

Trip CB

Start

Close CB

ZExtension

Def. Tr ip

First AR 1P

Trip CB 3P

AR in Prog.

AR Ready

AR Blocked

Trip 3-Pol

Trip CB

Start

Close CB

ZExtension

Def. Tr ip

First AR 1P

Trip CB 3P

AR in Prog.

AR Ready

AR Blocked

t inhibit. t Dead1 1P

time < t Oper.

Trip 3-Pol

t D iscrim. 1P

t Close

300 ms

IEC19000461 V1 EN-US

Figure 57: Timing diagram for scheme with main protections 1 and 2 (REB500sys), bothequipped with an autoreclosure function — Main protection 1 not in operation>> Response for successful autoreclosure

Settings:

• 1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P• 2..4. AR Mode = off• Zextension = on• ZE 1. AR = off

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

152 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 159: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000057-IEC19000462-1-en.vsdx

Trip CB

Start

Close CB

ZExtension

Def. Tr ip

First AR 1P

Trip CB 3P

AR in Prog.

AR Ready

AR Blocked

Trip 3-Pol

Main protection 2, AR blocked (because main protection 1 ready)

Main protection 1, AR ready

Trip CB

Start

Close CB

ZExtension

Def. Tr ip

First AR 1P

Trip CB 3P

AR in Prog.

AR Ready

AR Blocked

t Dead1 1P

time < t Oper.

Tr ip 3-Pol

t Discrim. 1P

IEC19000462 V1 EN-US

Figure 58: Timing diagram for scheme with main protections 1 and 2 (REB500sys), bothequipped with an autoreclosure function — Main protection 1 in operation >>Response for unsuccessful autoreclosure

Settings:

• 1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P• 2..4. AR Mode = off• Zextension = on• ZE 1. AR = off

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 153Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 160: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000058-IEC19000463-1-en.vsdx

Main protection 2, AR active ( because main protection 1 not ready)

Main protection 1 not ready

Trip CB

Start

Close CB

ZExtension

Def. Tr ip

First AR 1P

Trip CB 3P

AR in Prog.

AR Ready

AR Blocked

Trip 3-Pol

Trip CB

Start

Close CB

ZExtension

Def. Tr ip

First AR 1P

Trip CB 3P

AR in Prog.

AR Ready

AR Blocked

t Dead1 1P

time < t Oper.

Tr ip 3-Pol

t Discrim. 1P

IEC19000463 V1 EN-US

Figure 59: Timing diagram for scheme with main protections 1 and 2 (REB500sys), bothequipped with an autoreclosure function — Main protection 1 not in operation>> Response for unsuccessful autoreclosure

Settings:

• 1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P,• 2..4. AR Mode = off• Zextension = on• ZE 1. AR = off

5.8.8 Checking the dead timesGUID-AB1C349F-B540-4E71-B77D-D3DA75A571CE v1

When commissioning the autoreclosure function, it is not sufficient to check the combinedoperation of protection function, autoreclosure function and circuit-breaker, the resultingdead times must also be determined.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

154 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 161: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Since the dead time settings do not correspond to the effective total dead times, especially ina scheme with two circuit-breakers (see Figure 60), the period during which the circuit-breakeris actually open must be measured. This entails adjusting the dead time until the measuredbreaker time minus arcing and pre-ignition times and the inevitable CB tolerances result in anadequate composite dead time.

Providing the circuit-breakers at both ends of the line are of the same type and thus permit thesame tolerances to be assumed at both ends, the same dead time tp can be set in the twoterminal stations. Where this is not the case, the tripping and closing times of the two circuit-breakers must also be measured in addition to the dead times. The dead times set for the twoautoreclosure functions must then ensure that a sufficiently long “overlapping” dead timeexists to enable the circuit-breakers to deionize.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 155Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 162: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

180000059-IEC19000464-1-en.vsdx

C

O

B

0 1

2

3

4

5

6

(t)

t7

t6

t4

t2

t5t3

t1

tP

tWtS

C

O

A

0 1

2

34

5

6

A B

IEC19000464 V1 EN-US

Figure 60: Resulting composite dead time (Source: Guidelines for autoreclosure inelectrical power systems published by the German Association of PowerUtilities VDEW)

Where,

A: circuit-breaker 1 B: circuit-breaker 2

C: closed position O: open position

0: start 1: trip signal

2: contacts part 3: current interrupted

4: close signal 5: current flows again

6: contacts make t2: reclosing time

t1: tripping time t4: dead time

t3: arc extinction time t6: duration of interrupt

t5: pre-ignition time t7: resulting dead time

tp: dead time ts: inhibit time

tw: fault duration

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

156 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 163: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.9 Directional sensitive EF protection for groundedsystem 67N (DIREFGND)

5.9.1 Mode of operationGUID-2BFEE0BB-FBF7-404A-BA3F-A7CF1102EDE6 v1

High-resistance ground faults, which cannot be detected by the distance protection, can stillcause appreciable problems in spite of the relatively low fault currents involved.

The sensitive ground fault protection function has been included to complement the main lineprotection function and cover the low ground fault current range. The protection processesthe zero-sequence components 3I0 and 3U0.

5.9.2 FeaturesGUID-3D33BB3F-7C82-41CB-B322-7778B31D585C v1

• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics• Directional measurement of zero-sequence components (derived either internally or

externally)• Current pick-up enabling level• Reference voltage enabling level• Adjustable characteristic angle• Permissive and blocking transfer tripping schemes• Echo logic for weak infeed and open circuit-breaker• Transient blocking logic for reversal of energy direction

5.9.3 Inputs and outputs

5.9.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-CB029954-E781-47DD-ACCC-5BF0449C0C69 v1

• Voltage• Current

5.9.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-FCC3913A-72BB-43CD-B109-AD984CC4475A v1

• External blocking• Receive• CB closed• VT supervision• Starting and tripping by the distance function

5.9.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-BF84DA2A-D873-4040-A306-DC404723E033 v1

• Pick-up• Trip• Fault forwards• Fault backwards• Transmit• Block distance protection receive

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 157Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 164: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.9.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-4F266B55-988B-4E45-9509-C1016AAD18DC v1

• Neutral voltage (3U0)• Neutral current (3I0)• Real power component of neutral power (3U0 × 3I0, not rotated)• Apparent power component of neutral power (3U0 × 3I0, not rotated)• Fault direction (1 = forwards, -1 = backwards; this variable only applies when the binary

input CB closed is active)

5.9.4 Function settingsGUID-EFA80494-FF22-4492-B958-A730DBCE3E47 v1

Table 89: Directional sensitive EF protection for grounded system function - settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)

VoltageInp CT/VT-Addr VT U1-U3

CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr CT I1-I3

CTneutral Line side (Select)

I-Setting IN 0.100 0.100 1.000 0.01

V-Setting UN 0.200 0.003 1.000 0.001

Angle deg 60.0 -90.0 90.0 5

ComMode Permissive (Select)

SendMode MeasBwd (Select)

1 Channel off (Select)

Echo off (Select)

tBasic s 0.050 0.000 1.000 0.001

tWait s 0.050 0.000 0.500 0.001

tTransBlk s 0.100 0.000 0.500 0.001

Ext block BinaryAddr Always off

Receive BinaryAddr Always off

CB closed BinaryAddr Always off

VT Superv BinaryAddr Always off

Ext Start L1 BinaryAddr Always off

Ext Start L2 BinaryAddr Always off

Ext Start L3 BinaryAddr Always off

ExtTrip 3P BinaryAddr Always off

ExtTrip BinaryAddr Always off

Trip SignalAddr

Start SignalAddr

MeasFwd SignalAddr

MeasBwd SignalAddr

Send SignalAddr

Recve Inh. SignalAddr

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

158 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 165: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.9.5 ParametersGUID-3F728BFA-DB7A-4D26-A4F2-C09D5B846478 v1

Table 90: Directional sensitive EF protection for grounded system function - parameters

Signal Description

ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive.

VoltageInp Defines the VT input channel. All the VT input channels are available for selection.

CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel. All the CT input channels are available for selection.

CT neutral Side of the CTs on which the star-point is formed (current direction):

• line• busbar (reversed connection)

I-Setting Current pick-up setting

V-Setting Reference voltage pick-up setting

Angle Characteristic angle setting

ComMode Kind of transfer tripping scheme:

• permissive• blocking

SendMode For what system condition a signal is transmitted in an intertripping scheme:

• forwards measurement (only permissive scheme)• non-directional (only blocking scheme)• backwards measurement (only blocking scheme)

1 Channel Supplementary logic needed for coordinating ground fault and distanceprotections when using the same communications channel for a permissivescheme.

• off• on

Echo Echo logic for weak infeed and open CB:

• off Echo logic disabled• Weak Echo only for weak infeed• Bkr Echo only when CB open• Weak & Bkr Echo for weak infeed or CB open

tBasic Basic time setting

tWait Time allowed for a blocking signal to be transferred and for the directionalcomparison to be made.

tTransBlk Blocking time after a reversal of fault energy direction (transient blocking).

Ext Block I/P for an external blocking signal.

• F: enabled• T: disabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Receive PLC receive input.

• F: no PLC receive signal• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 159Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 166: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

CB closed CB position indicator input.

• F: function disabled• T: function enabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

VT Superv supervision input.

• F: tripping enabled• T: tripping disabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Ext Start L1Ext Start L2Ext Start L3Ext Trip 3PExt Trip

Inputs for the distance function signals Start L1, Start L2, Start L3, Trip CB 3P andTrip CB for coordinating operation.

• F: not connected• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Trip Tripping signal.

Start Output for signaling that the protection has picked up, that is, the current hasexceeded the enabling setting (I-Setting).

MeasFwd O/P for signaling a fault in the forwards direction.

MeasBwd O/P for signaling a fault in the backwards direction.

Send PLC transmit signal.

5.9.6 Configuration

5.9.6.1 Coordination with the distance protectionGUID-E9376218-990F-48DA-BC17-10D3136FA975 v1

Directional ground fault function as ancillary to the distance function

Compared with a standalone ground fault function, the ground fault function integrated in thedistance function needs certain starting and tripping signals generated by the distancefunction and the E/F protection is blocked in the following situations:

• starting of more than one distance phase• three-phase tripping• any trip (single and three-phase), if 1 Channel is set to on

Scheme with independent communication channels

Apart from the added security of redundancy, independent communication channels enabledifferent transfer tripping schemes to be used for ground fault and distance protections.

Providing the distance protection can detect a fault, it should trip before the ground faultprotection picks up. For this reason, the basic operating time (tBasic) for the ground faultprotection must be set longer than the longest response time to be expected of the distanceprotection.

Scheme with a common communication channel

Where ground fault and distance protections use the same communication channel, thetransfer tripping schemes must be either both permissive or both blocking. In the case ofpermissive schemes, in which the distance protection operates with non-directional criteria atone end for a weak infeed, a supplementary logic must be enabled by appropriately setting theparameter 1 Channel.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

160 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 167: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

This supplementary logic interlocks the distance protection receive signal at the end of theground fault function’s basic time or when it picks up in the backwards direction. To this end,the signal RecveInh is connected to the distance protection input ExtBlkHF. Thus thecommunication channel is initially available for use by the distance protection and only madeavailable to the ground fault protection at the end of the basic time. The basic time settingmust allow adequate time for the distance protection to detect and clear a fault if it can.

Independent directional ground fault protection

The ground fault function can also be applied as a stand-alone function, but only in MV and HVsystems.

The coordination of ground fault and distance protections in this case is achieved byappropriately setting the parameter tBasic.

If this time is too short, there is a likelihood that the ground fault protection will issue a three-phase trip before the circuit-breaker has opened for faults that have been correctly detectedby the distance protection.

The basic time of the ground fault protection must therefore be long enough to ensure thatthe distance protection can trip phase-selectively.

No facility is provided for using the distance relay starters to achieve phase-selective trippingby the directional ground fault function.

An independent directional ground fault function requires its own communication channel,which must be entirely independent of the distance protection.

5.9.6.2 Choice of operating modeGUID-6E522528-4761-40F6-A69B-97C1D5069710 v1

It is assumed that the ground fault protection settings at both ends of the protected line arethe same. This applies especially to the basic time, the blocking time, the transfer trippingscheme in use and options.

5.9.6.3 Choice of transfer tripping schemeGUID-692976A1-6A65-42D4-BEB9-AF17A9234C94 v1

In the case of a permissive directional comparison scheme, the amount of fault resistance,which can be detected, reduces towards the remote end of the line, because the enablingcurrent must be exceeded at both ends. Without additional precautions, the use of apermissive scheme would be limited on lines with a weak infeed at one end.

It was possible to eliminate this disadvantage by providing the directional ground faultprotection with its own echo logic for weak infeeds, which can be switched in and out asrequired.

The protection only operates in a comparison mode during the comparisontime (1 s) and is blocked at the end of this time. The comparison time starts atthe end of the basic time. information icon alerts the reader of important factsand conditions.

On the other hand, a directional comparison scheme using a blocking signal is able to detecthigh-resistance ground faults along the whole length of the line, because the protection at thestrong infeed end is always able to trip although the current at the weak infeed end does notreach the enabling level.

Permissive directional comparison scheme

In this scheme, each of the protection functions has to receive a signal from the opposite endof line in order to be able to trip. A protection function sends a permissive signal when its

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 161Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 168: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

current exceeds the enabling level I-setting, the basic time tBasic has expired and the faultdetected is in the forwards direction.

Options:

• Echo Bkr:ProvidingThis parameter is active, a permissive signal (echo) is sent to the opposite end of the line,if the local circuit-breaker is open and a signal is received. Tripping is thus possible at theinfeed end.The duration of the echo signal is limited to 150 ms.

• Non-directional echo (Weak infeed)If the directional ground fault function at the weak infeed end of a line cannot measure,because the reference voltage is too low or the current does not reach the enabling level, asignal is returned to the opposite end of the line if one is received.This enables tripping to take place at the end with the stronger infeed.

ANDANDAND

ANDANDAND

tBasictBasicStart

ANDANDAND

ANDANDAND

tBasictBasicStart

Send

Receive

Send

Receive

Rel. 1 Rel. 2

18000060-IEC19000465-1-en.vsdx

FWD

RVS

Dir

ectio

na

l

Ch

ara

cte

ristic

INx>INx>

FWD

RVS

Dire

ctio

na

l

Ch

ara

cte

ristic

INx>INx>

A1 A2

IEC19000465 V1 EN-US

Figure 61: Principle of a permissive directional comparison scheme

where:

• Start: current higher than the enabling level I-setting• tBasic : basic time• MeasFwd: fault in forwards direction

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

162 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 169: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000061-IEC19000466-1-en.vsdx

I0

U0

I-dir

I-Setting

V-Setting

Iasymm

Tx: I-Setting MeasFwd tBasic T: I-Setting MeasFwd tBasic Rx

TB: MeasBwd t TransBlk

<Tx: MeasBwd Rx>

TB: MeasBwd t TransBlk

<Tx: MeasBwd Rx>

Echo

Echo and “Transient blocking”

Basic functions

IEC19000466 V1 EN-US

Figure 62: Operation of a permissive directional comparison scheme

where:

• <...>: optional function• Iasymm: asymmetrical currents under normal load conditions• I-dir: current enable for directional measurement (= 0.7 I-Setting)• I-Setting: current enabling level• MeasBwd: fault in backwards direction including Transient blocking• MeasBwd': fault in backwards direction• MeasFwd: fault in forwards direction• Rx: receive• T: trip• t TransBlk: blocking time• TB: transient blocking• tBasic: basic time• tWait: waiting time• Tx: send• V-setting: reference voltage

Blocking directional comparison scheme

Providing the conditions for directional measurement are fulfilled, that is, the current higherthan I-dir and the voltage higher than its enabling level V-setting, a protection functiontransmits a blocking signal to the remote station immediately when a fault is detected in thebackward direction.

I-dir = 0.7 I-Setting

A protection function measuring a fault in the direction of the protected line trips at the end ofthe adjustable waiting time tWait, providing a blocking signal is not received beforehand.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 163Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 170: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Options:

• SendMode: non-directionalA blocking signal is transmitted in this mode, if the current is higher than I-dir, the basictime has expired and no fault is detected in the forwards direction (including situationswhen a direction measurement is impossible, because 3U0 < V-Setting).

ANDANDAND

ANDANDAND

tBasictBasic

Send

Receive

Rel. 1

18000062-IEC19000467-1-en.vsdx

RVS

FWD

Dir

ectio

na

l

Ch

ara

cte

ristic

INx>

tWaittWait

tBasictBasic

IN>DirIN>Dir

ANDANDAND

ANDANDAND

tBasictBasic

Send

ReceiveRVS

FWD

Dir

ectio

na

l

Ch

ara

cte

ristic

INx>

tWaittWait

tBasictBasic

IN>DirIN>Dir

Rel. 2

A1 A2

IEC19000467 V1 EN-US

Figure 63: Principle of a blocking scheme

where:

• I-dir: current enable for directional measurement (= 0.7 I-Setting)• I-Setting: current enabling level• MeasFwd: fault in forwards direction• MeasBwd': fault in backwards direction• tBasic: basic time• tWait: waiting time

18000063-IEC19000468-1-en.vsdx

I0

U0

I-dir

I-Setting

U-Setting

Iasymm

Tx: I-dir MeasBwd tBasic

<+I-dir MeasFwd tBasic>

D: I-Setting MeasFwd tBasic R tWait

TB: MeasBwd tTransBl

Tx: I-dir MeasBwd tBasic

<+I-dir MeasFwd tBasic>

TB: MeasBwd tTransBl

<S: I-dir

MeasFwd tBasic>

Non-directional transmission

Basic functions

V-Setting

I-Setting

I-dir

I0

U0

Iasym m

IEC19000468 V1 EN-US

Figure 64: Operation of a blocking scheme

where:

• <...>: optional function• Iasymm: asymmetrical currents under normal load conditions• I-dir: current enable for directional measurement (= 0.7 I-Setting)

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

164 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 171: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

• I-Setting: current enabling level• MeasBwd: fault in backwards direction including Transient blocking• MeasBwd': fault in backwards direction• MeasFwd: fault in forwards direction• Rx: receive• T: trip• t TransBlk: blocking time• TB: transient blocking• tBasic: basic time• tWait: waiting time• Tx: send• V-setting: reference voltage

5.9.6.4 Setting the enabling pick-up levelsGUID-E1B70D52-C69A-43A2-AA45-C8502F086DE2 v1

The setting of the current enabling I-dir must take account of the zero-sequence component innormal operation arising from system asymmetries.

The pick-up setting for the voltage enabling signal V-Setting is determined by the level ofasymmetries on the secondary side (VT tolerances, asymmetrical burdens etc.).

The ability to read voltage and current values on the relay is a useful aid for determining thesesettings.

For example, if the enabling current setting I-Setting is too low, the pick-up signal lightscontinuously (current circuit enabled).

Since a ground fault causes asymmetrical voltages in the vicinity of the fault, the currentflowing via the system capacitances also has a zero-sequence component. A capacitive currentof this kind on a long line lies within the setting range of the sensitive ground fault protectionfunction.

The pick-up level I-dir of the current circuit for the directional measurement has a fixed settingof 0.7 × I-Setting to take account of influences, such as CT errors and the capacitive chargingcurrents of the line.

The following procedure is recommended for setting the pick-up levels:

• The enabling current for the directional measurement must be set to at least twice themaximum possible asymmetrical current, which can occur in normal operation.

-Setting 2.0asymm

N

II

I

• The voltage pick-up must be set to 1.6 times the level of the spurious voltages, which canoccur due to asymmetries in the VT secondary circuit.

- sec.asymm

N

UV Setting 1.6

U

where:

• Iasymm: current component 3I0 caused by asymmetrical load currents• IN: primary CT rated current• I-Setting: setting of the enabling current

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 165Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 172: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

• UN: 100 V or 200 V according to VT unit in use• Usec.asymm: voltage component 3U0 caused by asymmetries in the VT secondary circuit

(for example, VT errors)• V-Setting: setting of the enabling voltage for the directional measurement

5.9.6.5 Setting the characteristic angleGUID-D6147D84-E5FB-4E1F-B114-0F4C7864946E v1

The line marking the reversal of direction lies at ±90° in relation to the reference voltage.

To achieve symmetrical operation of the directional element in spite of this, the characteristicangle should be equal that of the zero-sequence impedance of the source.

5.9.6.6 Setting the basic time (tBasic)GUID-531CDD9D-C567-43B4-946F-31C9348D726C v1

The basic time is the period between pick-up of the protection and the earliest possible trip.

The operation of the protection function can be coordinated with others on the same line byjudiciously setting the basic time.

The basic time is also used to achieve coordination between the ground fault function (three-phase tripping) and the distance function (phase-selective tripping). The ground faultprotection is delayed to allow time for the distance protection to respond to a fault if it ispossible.

The basic time is normally set to:

tBasic > max. tripping time of the phase-selective distance protection (taking account of signaltransmission time and sequential tripping)

+ CB operating time

+ aux. contact time (input CB closed)

+ safety margin

The sum of these times is usually about 100 to 200 ms.

5.9.6.7 Circuit-breaker delayGUID-0F4DD3FD-FE64-4784-BA07-69EFF6C0C9F8 v1

To avoid operation of the enabling current detector during the transient oscillations, whichoccur following the closing of the circuit-breaker, it is blocked for 50 ms upon receiving thecorresponding signal from the CB.

5.9.6.8 Comparison timeGUID-32875FF0-D8CE-4860-BD15-09FAB2469AF8 v1

The comparison time is the time allowed for the directional comparison to be made and istherefore dependent on the type of transfer tripping scheme.

The comparison time has a fixed setting of 1 s.

5.9.6.9 Setting the wait time (tWait)GUID-CA14249E-57B2-4E96-A6C9-BD2D0FB9F99C v1

The waiting time is also started at the end of the basic time, but is only effective in a blockingscheme.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

166 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 173: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

In a blocking scheme, tripping is delayed by the setting of tWait to allow time for theprotection at the remote end to decide on the direction of the fault and to transmit acorresponding blocking signal, if necessary.

tWait should be set at least as long as the measuring time (about 30 ms) plus the longestpossible signal transmission time.

5.9.6.10 Setting the transient blocking time (t TransBlk)GUID-4B3A8D0A-C2FF-4303-843F-DCD831178124 v1

The protection function includes a transient blocking logic to prevent any mal-operationduring the course of tripping a fault or autoreclosure on double-circuit lines, when there is alikelihood of the flow of energy reversing direction. The time setting can be selected in a widerange to suit the prevailing conditions.

For example, after a fault has been detected in the backwards direction, a second directionaldecision in the forwards direction is inhibited for the setting of t TransBlk.

The time chosen is determined largely by the time required for the measurement to reset andthe transfer tripping scheme in use.

The recommended setting is 60 ms plus the reset time of the communication channel.

5.9.6.11 CT/VT inputs of the functionGUID-E238F9D9-12D1-428D-984B-93F37D0D5173 v1

Where the zero-sequence components of the voltages and the currents are derived internally,the CT and VT inputs must be connected precisely as shown in the wiring diagram. The neutralof the CTs in this case is formed on the line side and the parameter CT neutral must be set toline side.

5.9.6.12 Supplementary information for binary inputsGUID-75464C67-88D9-463F-BB75-563F5B765F94 v1

Ext Block

Applying a signal to the Ext. Block input disables the entire protection function.

Receive

The signal transmitted by the protection at the remote end is connected to this input.

CB closed

The CB closed input is intended for the position indicator signal from the circuit-breaker andhas a fixed pick-up delay of 50 ms. The protection function is only enabled when this signal isreceived to confirm that the CB is closed. The corresponding auxiliary contacts for the threephases must be connected in series to ensure that the protection does not operate duringsingle-phase reclosure.

The echo logic is enabled 100 ms after the circuit-breaker is opened.

VT Supervision

The VT Superv input is needed to block the echo logic. It can be excited either by the VTSupsignal from the internal distance protection function or an auxiliary contact on the MCB via abinary input.

If this input is not needed, it must be set to F.

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 167Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 174: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Ext Start L1. Ext Start L2, Ext Start L3, Ext Trip 3P, Ext Trip

These inputs are for coordinating operation with the distance protection function. To themare connected the distance function signals Start L1, Start L2, Start L3, Trip CB 3P and TripCB.

They must be set to F if an independent directional ground fault scheme is in use.

5.9.6.13 Supplementary information for binary outputsGUID-C44B0120-A06C-4E67-9516-5FCFD1329619 v1

Trip

There are two Trip signals, one for energizing the tripping relay via the tripping logic and theother for controlling LEDs and signaling contacts.

Start

An active Start output signals that the zero-sequence current has exceeded the pick-upsetting I-Setting. This signal is only generated providing the function is not blocked.

MeasFwd

MeasFwd is active when the measuring element detects a fault in the forwards direction, thatis, the settings of I-dir and V-setting have been exceeded.

MeasBwd

MeasBwd is active when the measuring element detects a fault in the backwards direction,that is, the settings of I-dir and V-setting have been exceeded.

Send

The Send output is the signal sent to the remote end of the line.

Receive Inhibit

The Recve Inh signal prevents the distance function from receiving a PLC signal (see Section5.9.6.1). It is only generated when the parameter 1 Channel is set, the basic time has expired orthe ground fault protection picks up for a reverse fault.

The signal Recve Inh must be connected to the distance function input ExtBlkHF.

5.10 Inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection 51N(I0INV)

5.10.1 Mode of operationGUID-E5F6C837-2144-4F8A-AA85-43A583DE3E31 v1

Overcurrent function with inverse time characteristic. A typical application is as back-up forthe ground fault protection function, in which case it measures 3 I0 either supplied from anexternal source or internally derived.

5.10.2 FeaturesGUID-65205166-1E80-4340-989B-7ADB304A4F83 v1

• Tripping characteristic according to British Standard 142:c = 0.02: normal inversec = 1: very inverse and long time earth fault

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

168 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 175: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

c = 2: extremely inverse• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics• External 3 I0 signal or 3 I0 internally derived from the three-phase currents• Wider setting range than specified in BS 142

5.10.3 Inputs and outputs

5.10.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-5EABFB3B-A068-4F53-A182-4442888C417C v1

• Current

5.10.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-B6536C2D-81FD-4FC1-9795-E7F169FB12B2 v1

• Blocking

5.10.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-E4B40A3A-E822-4016-9FA6-8FEED6DF0842 v1

• Starting• Tripping

5.10.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-781E4787-7BED-4D41-B2BB-44121AACEE17 v1

• Neutral current

5.10.4 Function settingsGUID-E3F8BFC3-6B93-47A9-98DE-2C0730B455EA v1

Table 91: Inverse time earth fault overcurrent function - settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)

c-Setting 1.00 (Select)

k1-Setting s 013.5 0.01 200.0 0.01

IStart IB 1.10 1.00 4.00 0.01

tmin s 00.0 00.0 10.0 0.1

NrOfPhases 1 1 3 2

CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr 0

IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.04 2.50 0.01

BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off

Trip SignalAddr

Start SignalAddr

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 169Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 176: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.10.5 ParametersGUID-546BE3C2-EB4B-4877-92B1-A62C22782EC4 v1

Table 92: Inverse time earth fault overcurrent function - parameters

Signal Description

ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive.

CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel. All the current channels are available for selection.

c-Setting Setting for the exponential factor determining the shape of the operatingcharacteristic according to BS 142 or for selecting the RXIDG characteristic.

k1-Setting Tripping characteristic constant

IStart Pick-up setting (initiates the tripping characteristic).

tmin Definite minimum time of the tripping characteristic.

NrOfPhases Number of phases evaluated for measurement:

• 1: neutral current direct from an CT input• 3: neutral current derived internally from the three phases

IB-Setting Reference current to take account of discrepancies with respect to IN.

BlockingInp I/P for the external blocking signal.

• F: unused• T: function always blocked• xx: all binary I/P's (or O/P's of protection functions)

Trip Tripping signal

Start Pick-up signal

5.10.6 ConfigurationGUID-7782BCDB-EEF4-4AE5-8B8A-204E8D180EFE v1

Protection function enable IStart

The function starts to run when the current applied to the function exceeds the setting IStart.IStart is normally set to 1.1 IB.

Choice of tripping characteristic c-Setting

The shape of the IDMT characteristic is determined by the constant c.

The standard IDMT characteristics according to BS 142 are:

normal inverse: c = 0.02

very inverse and long time earthfault:

c = 1.00

extremely inverse: c = 2.00

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

170 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 177: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

180000064-IEC19000469-1-en.vsdx

t

I

IStart

IB

t =

k1

I

IB

c

1

tmin

IEC19000469 V1 EN-US

Figure 65: Tripping characteristic of Inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection

The c-Setting can also be set to RXIDG, in which case the functions inverse characteristiccorresponds to that of the relay Type RXIDG:

[ ] 5.8 1.35 ( )Bt s Ln I I

The parameter k1-Setting has no influence in this case.

Multiplier k1-Setting

The multiplier k1-Setting enables the earth fault overcurrent inverse time characteristic to beshifted. This is used for grading a series of relays along a line to achieve discrimination.

For example, in the case of the very inverse characteristic, the constant c = 1 and the factor k1 ≤13.5. The operating time t is given by the equation:

1

031

B

kt

I

I

Assuming a grading time of 0.5 s at 6 times the base current IB is required, the factor k1 foreach of the relays is given by:

k1 = 5 t

For operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s, this results in the following settings for k1:

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 171Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 178: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

t [s] k1 [s]

0.5 2.5

1 5

1.5 7.5

2 10

2,5 12.5

The characteristics according to BS 142 are set as follows:

normal inverse: k1 = 0.14 s

very inverse: k1 = 13.5 s

extremely inverse: k1 = 80 s

long time earth fault: k1 = 120 s

Definite minimum time tmin

Where the inverse time earth fault overcurrent function is being applied as backup protectionfor a directional ground fault protection, the definite minimum time tmin must be set asfollows:

• tmin = tbasic + tcomp• tbasic = basic time of the ground fault function• tcomp = comparison time of the ground fault function (1 s)

Interconnections between Inverse time earth fault overcurrentprotection and directional E/F functions

The inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection is non-directional.

Directional operation can, however, be achieved by linking the directional signal (MeasFwd,that is, fault in forwards direction) from the ground fault protection to the blocking input ofthe inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection. The input must be inverted so thatblocking of the function is cancelled by an active forwards signal.

When using this arrangement, it must be noted that, when MeasFwd does not pick up, the I0-Invers function cannot trip when the reference voltage of the ground fault function is too low.If tripping is required for this case, the directional ground fault signal MeasBwd must beapplied to the blocking input.

Applications with single-phase reclosure

In schemes involving single-phase reclosure, the I0-Invers function has to be blocked for thetime that one pole of a circuit-breakers is open if the minimum tripping time tmin is set lessthan the single-phase dead time. This avoids false three-phase tripping due to the loadcurrents in the healthy phases.

Typical settings

• IB: to be calculated• IStart: 1.1 IB• c: depends on the protected unit• k1: to be calculated• tmin: 0.00

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

172 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 179: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.11 Logic/Trip Logic (LOGIC)

5.11.1 Mode of operationGUID-96D3CFD9-0D98-4926-BE3D-BAF8095A4F96 v1

Logical combination of binary input signals or of output signals from the protection functions,for example, for:

• specific signals required by the application• supplementary protection functions

5.11.2 FeaturesGUID-3DB24C13-336F-4644-88F0-A2F8F5A37902 v1

• Binary input channels assignable to:

• binary input signals• protection function output signals

• All input channels can be inverted• Following logic functions available for selection:

• OR gate with 4 inputs• AND gate with 4 inputs• R/S flip-flop with 2 inputs for setting and 2 inputs for resetting:

• The output is 0, if at least one of the reset inputs is 1.• The output is 1, if at least one of the set inputs is 1 AND none of the reset

inputs is 1.• The output status is sustained when all the inputs are at 0.

• Every logic has an additional blocking input, which when activated switches theoutput to 0.

5.11.3 Inputs and outputs

5.11.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-8E843CD7-DFCF-451A-9D4E-8C4505AE706C v1

• None

5.11.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-A1855F4E-9841-47BD-9978-B00A139C02A6 v1

• 4 logic inputs• Blocking

5.11.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-FCB2413A-EC87-4AE4-BF7B-3823EC3A8A85 v1

• Signal (Logic)• Tripping (Trip Logic)

5.11.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-461B67E7-3E21-4C9F-B33C-D81294D21AEE v1

• None

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 173Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 180: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.11.4 Function settingsGUID-A7084910-3F39-4F82-994C-CB19D2C42F70 v1

Table 93: Logic function - settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)

Logic Mode OR (Select)

BinOutput SignalAddr

BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off

BinInp1 (R1) BinaryAddr Always off

BinInp2 (R2) BinaryAddr Always off

BinInp3 (S1) BinaryAddr Always off

BinInp4 (S2) BinaryAddr Always off

5.11.5 ParametersGUID-FFD23A75-A981-4847-AA5D-AA085E47A10A v1

Table 94: Logic function - parameters

Signal Description

ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active.

Logic Mode Definition of the logic function to be performed by the 4 binary inputs. Possiblesettings:

• OR: OR gate with all 4 binary inputs• AND: AND gate with all 4 binary inputs• R/S flip-flop: Flip-flop with 2 set inputs (S1 and S2) and 2 reset inputs (R1 and

R2). The output is set or reset when at least one of the corresponding inputs isat logical 1 (OR gate). Reset inputs take priority over the set inputs.

BinOutput Output for signaling a trip (logic) respectively tripping (trip logic)

BlockInp Input for blocking the function

• F: not used• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

The output is always at logical 0 when the blocking input is at logical 1. The blockinginput acts as a reset input for the flip-flop function.

BinInp (R1)BinInp2 (R2)BinInp3 (S1)BinInp4 (S2)

Binary inputs 1 to 4 (AND or OR function)Reset inputs 1 and 2 and set inputs 1 and 2 (RS flip-flop)

• F: not used (OR logic or RS flip-flop in logic mode)• T: not used (AND logic in logic mode)• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

5.12 Delay/Integrator (DELAY)

5.12.1 Mode of operationGUID-B9A42598-E62D-4AAC-8FE6-8C1DA244A48C v1

General purpose timer for:

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

174 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 181: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

• Integration of pulsating binary signals to obtain a continuous signal, for example, outputof the loss-of-excitation function (out-of-step protection) or reverse power protection

• Extension of short I/P signals (pulse prolongation)• Simple time delay

5.12.2 FeaturesGUID-F97DB054-B13E-4E30-85DF-4F315988DC2F v1

• Input channel and blocking input assignable to:

• binary input signals• protection function output signals

• Input channel and blocking input can be inverted.• Adjustable reset time• 2 types of time delay:

• Integration: Only the time during which the input signal is at logical 1 counts at theend of the time delay.

• No integration: The total time from the instant the timer starts until it is either resetor expires counts.

5.12.3 Inputs and outputs

5.12.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-54D2B968-A98D-438A-935B-307DBC75FF29 v1

• None

5.12.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-43DB6E1E-779C-4DA4-9640-8ADC5AEF7422 v1

• Input signal• Blocking

5.12.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-E3343A2A-D0CE-496F-BAE3-E6B1D30F077E v1

• Pick-up• Tripping

5.12.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-705F1915-B394-44BA-BAB0-C33D582D02EE v1

• Time from the instant the timer starts

5.12.4 Function settingsGUID-42EEB88B-C55F-4D79-BF31-2427C9BD32E2 v1

Table 95: Delay function - Settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)

Trip-Delay s 01.00 00.00 300.00 0.01

Reset-Delay s 00.01 00.00 300.00 0.01

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 175Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 182: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

Integration 0/1 0 0 1 1

BinaryInp BinaryAddr Always off

BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off

Trip SignalAddr

Start SignalAddr

5.12.5 ParametersGUID-40CF9957-9979-46E5-8B57-8FA43FF48AD7 v1

Table 96: Delay function - Parameters

Signal Description

ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active.

Trip-Delay Time between start signal at the input and the tripping signal at the output.

Reset-Delay Time required for the timer to reset after the input signal has disappeared.

Integration Determination of the response of the function in the presence of a pulsating inputsignal:

• 0: The delay continues to run, providing the input signal does not disappear forlonger than the reset time.

• 1: The time during which the input is at logical 1 is integrated, that is, trippingdoes not take place until the sum of logical 1 time equals the set delay time.

BinaryInp Timer input

• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

BlockInp Input for blocking the function

• F: enabled• T: disabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Trip Tripping signal

Start Pick-up signal

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

176 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 183: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.12.6 Configuration

5.12.6.1 Operation of the function without integrationGUID-BE6B0E31-83CE-4C88-ABCC-0BA8078CA6D6 v1

18000065-IEC19000470-1-en.vsdx

Start

Impulse prolongation

Tripping

0

0

0

t

t

t

(No tripping)

t

t

t

tR

0

0

0

t

t

t

t

t

t

0

0

0

0

0

0

tR tR

tA

(No tripping)

tA

(No tripping)

tAtA

tR tR tR

Start

Impulse prolongation

Tripping

IEC19000470 V1 EN-US

Figure 66: Operation of the delay function without integration

Tripping only takes place, if a start also occurs within the time tR.

• tA tripping time (Trip-Delay)• tR reset time (Reset-Delay)

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 177Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 184: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.12.6.2 Operation of the function with integrationGUID-FC89EE7B-03CD-4956-A9DD-B7B6D8AE6DFB v1

18000066-IEC19000471-1-en.vsdx

0

0

0

t

t

t

t

t

t

tR

0

0

0

t

t

t

t

t

t

0

0

0

0

0

0

tin t

Setting

(No tripping)

SettingSetting

0

0

0

t

t

t

t

t

t

tR

0

0

0

t

t

t

t

t

t

0

0

0

0

0

0

tin t

Setting

(No tripping)

SettingSetting

Start

Tripping

Integration

tin t tin t

Start

Tripping

Integration

tin t

Setting

(No tripping)

tR tR

tR tR tR tR

IEC19000471 V1 EN-US

Figure 67: Operation of the delay function with integration

• tint integrated time for tripping• tR reset time (Reset-Delay)• Setting Trip-Delay

5.13 Three-phase current plausibility 46 (I3PH)

5.13.1 Mode of operationGUID-64F2F15C-D25A-4639-9172-6BFC4F4EAF8B v1

Checking the plausibility of the three-phase current inputs for:

• monitoring the symmetry of the three-phase system• detection of a residual current• supervision of the CT input channels

5.13.2 FeaturesGUID-9D144F5E-9E88-4A00-99BF-76BF42FCE208 v1

Evaluation of:

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

178 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 185: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

• the sum of the three-phase currents• the sequence of the three-phase currents• provision for comparing the sum of the three-phase currents with a residual current input• adjustment of residual current amplitude• blocking at high currents (higher than 2 × IN)• blocking of phase-sequence monitoring at low currents (below 0.05 × IN)• insensitive to DC components• insensitive to harmonics

5.13.3 Inputs and outputs

5.13.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-6903FDD9-78BE-4BC7-BBBE-DB3C1ED26353 v1

• Phase currents

5.13.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-B5C04044-60D7-4FF6-B074-B7B6B9A18308 v1

• Blocking

5.13.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-5C506AEB-CB08-4C01-A40F-A781D202DD3F v1

• Tripping

5.13.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-16C59088-A3A6-4D1B-BC6A-F25743D4CEF4 v1

• Difference between the vector sum of the three-phase currents and the neutral current

5.13.4 Function settingsGUID-A1348575-07E6-4E14-A2B9-3A194AA0B057 v1

Table 97: Three-phase current plausibility function - settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select) (Select)

I-Setting IN 0.20 0.05 1.00 0.05

Delay s 10.00 0.1 60.0 0.1

CT-Compens 01.00 -2.00 2.00 0.01

CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr CT-I1-I3

BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off

Trip SignalAddr

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 179Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 186: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.13.5 ParametersGUID-501DB0C4-931D-457E-9D87-8412CAD11296 v1

Table 98: Three-phase current plausibility function - parameters

Signal Description

ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active.

I-Setting Current setting for tripping

Delay Time between start signal at the I/P and the tripping signal at the output.Forbidden settings:= 1 s for current settings = 0.2 IN

CT-Compens Amplitude compensation factor for the residual current input, enabling differenttransformation ratios of the main CTs for phase and residual currents to beequalized.The polarity of the residual current can be reversed by entering negativevalues.

CurrentInp Defines the current input channel.Any of the three-phase current inputs may be selected.

BlockInp Input for blocking the function.

• F: enabled• T: disabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Trip Tripping signal

If the phase sequence is incorrect, tripping takes place regardless of setting (I-Setting).

5.14 Three-phase voltage plausibility 47 (U3PH)

5.14.1 Mode of operationGUID-DFFD6CC5-9BC6-492C-9A4B-2A5DB48A79A9 v1

Checking the plausibility of the three-phase voltage inputs for

• detection of residual voltage• monitoring the asymmetry of the three-phase voltage system due to the zero-sequence

component• supervision of the VT input channels

5.14.2 FeaturesGUID-5AC61C76-D785-48F2-81F7-D87528474E04 v1

Evaluation of:

• the sum of the three phase voltages• the sequence of the three phase voltages• Provision for comparing the sum of the three phase voltages with a residual voltage input• Adjustment of residual voltage amplitude• Blocking at high voltages (higher than 1.2 × UN)• Blocking of phase-sequence monitoring at low voltages (below 0.4 × UN phase-to-phase)• Insensitive to DC components• Insensitive to harmonics

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

180 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 187: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Evaluation of the phase voltages is only possible in the case of Y connected inputtransformers, otherwise the residual component cannot be detected.

5.14.3 Inputs and outputs

5.14.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-38DA99A8-F99F-4607-BD92-17769ADB7CF6 v1

• Phase voltages• Neutral voltage (optional)

5.14.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-677C8FDF-21D7-4FAA-8718-EECCD5AA7607 v1

• Blocking

5.14.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-5D8F8B4C-BA80-4770-AC61-EB924CE8E064 v1

• Tripping

5.14.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-3AE816A8-2C66-47C3-8D60-5AA8E29686B8 v1

• Difference between the vector sum of the three phase voltages and the neutral voltage

5.14.4 Function settingsGUID-AA89E181-6F04-489A-97BF-871F7B7B3A36 v1

Table 99: Three-phase voltage plausibility function - settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select) (Select)

V-setting UN 0.20 0.05 1.20 0.05

Delay s 10.00 0.1 60.0 0.1

VT-Compens 01.00 -2.00 2.00 0.01

VoltageInp CT/VT-Addr VT U1-U3

SumInp CT/VT-Addr 0

BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off

Trip Signaladdr

5.14.5 ParametersGUID-978F9F5D-A13B-4F69-BBCB-4D44BAC54CEB v1

Table 100: Three-phase voltage plausibility function - parameters

Signal Description

ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive.

V-setting Voltage setting for tripping

Delay Time between start signal at the I/P and the tripping signal at the output.Forbidden setting:= 1 s for voltage settings = 0.2 UN

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 181Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 188: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

VT-Compens Amplitude compensation factor for the residual voltage input, enabling differenttransformation ratios of the main VTs for phase and residual voltages to beequalized.The polarity of the residual voltage can be reversed by enteringnegative values.

VoltageInp Defines the voltage input channel.Any of the three-phase voltage inputs may be selected.Not applicable with deltaconnected VTs.

SumInp Defines the neutral voltage input channel.Any of the single-phase voltage inputs may be selected.

Blocking Input for blocking the function.F: enabledT: disabledxx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Trip Tripping signal

If the phase sequence is incorrect, tripping takes place regardless of setting (V-Setting).

5.15 Peak value over and undercurrent protection 50(OCINST)

5.15.1 Mode of operationGUID-D7DE20A4-ACBA-4383-B058-EF37A04454F0 v1

• General current monitoring with instantaneous response (over and undercurrent)• Current monitoring where insensitivity to frequency is required (over and undercurrent)

5.15.2 FeaturesGUID-B08B6010-76E7-49F0-B403-0547FAB5381A v1

• Processes instantaneous values and is therefore fast and largely independent offrequency

• Stores the peak value following pick-up• No suppression of DC component• No suppression of harmonics• Single or three-phase measurement• Maximum value detection in the three-phase mode• Adjustable lower frequency limit fmin

5.15.3 Inputs and outputs

5.15.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-829955A0-16B4-4003-9B13-339BBA78AE46 v1

• Current

5.15.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-5E6D5A77-0397-4A00-A225-563A43365136 v1

• Blocking

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

182 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 189: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

5.15.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-A1943FFD-B15A-4583-A19B-4352E7F6922C v1

• Pick-up• Tripping

5.15.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-8618F28F-F326-4B28-A986-23B529E2A35D v1

• Current amplitude (only available if function trips)

5.15.4 Function settingsGUID-1C17972E-91CB-437B-9A6F-2DDC7F027B50 v1

Table 101: Peak value over and undercurrent function - settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step

ParSet ç..1 P1 (Select)

Delay s 0.01 0.00 60.00 0.01

I-Setting IN 4.0 0.1 20 0.1

f-min Hz 40 2 50 1

NrOfPhases 1 Ph (Select)

CurrentInp CT-Addr 0

BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off

Trip SignalAddr

Start SignalAddr

5.15.5 ParametersGUID-BD1F3084-704F-4617-ABE3-D8B9C56574AD v1

Table 102: Peak value over and undercurrent function - parameters

Signal Description

ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active.

Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping.

I-Setting Pick-up current setting.Setting restrictions:

• > 1.6 IN (when supplied from metering cores)• < 0.2 IN (when supplied from protection cores)

f-min Defines the minimum frequency for which measurement is required.Setting restriction:< 40 Hz (when supplied from metering cores)

MaxMin Defines operation as overcurrent or undercurrent.Settings:

• MAX: overcurrent• MIN: undercurrent

NrOfPhases Defines whether single or three-phase measurement.

CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel.All current inputs may be selected.

Table continues on next page

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 183Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 190: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

Signal Description

BlockInp Binary address used as blocking input.

• F: not blocked• T: blocked• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)

Trip Output for signaling tripping

Start Output for signaling pick-up

5.15.6 ConfigurationGUID-7B3DB3D5-177E-44BC-BC57-57B378E2AF2C v1

The following parameters have to be set:

Current pick-up I-Setting

Delay Delay

Minimum frequency f-min

Over or undercurrent MaxMin

The instantaneous overcurrent function is a high-speed protection which operates in a widefrequency range. It is intended primarily for two applications.

A protection measuring peak value is necessary for protecting units, for which the influence ofDC component and harmonics may not be neglected. This is especially the case whererectifiers with semiconductors are involved.

Due to very small frequency sensitivity and with the peak value acquisition the protection cancovers a large frequency range.

The measuring principle of the function is relatively insensitive to frequency and operates in arange extending from 4% to 120% of rated frequency. It is therefore able to protect units withsynchronous starting equipment during the starting sequence before reaching systemfrequency (for example, gas turbine sets with solid-state starters).

The function detects when the instantaneous value of the input current exceeds the peak valuecorresponding to the setting. For example, for a setting of 10 IN, it will pick up when the inputcurrent exceeds 10 √2 IN = 14.14 IN (see Figure 68). A fault current of 6 × 1.8 √2 IN = 15.27 IN couldreach this level as a consequence of a DC component.

The minimum frequency must be entered for every application, because it determines thereset time. A low minimum frequency means a long reset delay and since a good protection isexpected to have a quick response, the reset time should be as short as possible, that is, theminimum frequency setting should not be lower than absolutely necessary.

Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions

184 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 191: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

18000067-IEC19000472-1-en.vsdx

0

5

10

1514.14

10 IN

t

0 t

Setting current

Output signal

0

5

10

1514.14

10 IN

t

0 t

Setting current

Output signal

IN

i

IN

i

IEC19000472 V1 EN-US

Figure 68: Operation of the peak value overcurrent function

Typical settings:Peak value phase fault protection

I-Setting according to application

Delay 0.01 s

f-min 40 Hz

1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions

Bay protection functions REB500 185Technical manual

© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved

Page 192: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

186

Page 193: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

187

Page 194: Bay protection functions REB500 Version 8.3 IEC …...Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws

ABB ABGrid Automation ProductsSE-721 59 Västerås, SwedenPhone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00

www.abb.com/protection-control

© Copyright 2019 ABB.All rights reserved.

Scan this QR code to visit our website

1MR

K 5

05

40

6-U

EN